JP2015043999A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine which eases wire connection even when an entire width of a connection terminal device is made small.SOLUTION: A connection terminal device 600 has a substrate 602 and a plurality of wire connection parts 604a and 604b formed on the substrate 602. The wire connection parts 604a and 604b have: openings in which wires are inserted; terminal boards electrically connected to the wires; oscillating operation part materials one end parts of which are freely oscillably supported by the substrate 602 and where press operation parts are formed at the other end parts and press parts pressing the wires against the terminal boards are formed; and coil springs biasing the oscillating operation part materials. A length in the back and forth direction of the press operation parts in one adjacent wire connection part 604b is set shorter than that of the press operation part in the other wire connection part 604a.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with an external terminal plate having a connection terminal device for outputting a jackpot signal or the like to a hall computer (Patent Document 1).

FIG. 62 is a plan view of a conventional connection terminal device 800.
63 is a cross-sectional view along the line DD ′ in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 62, the connection terminal device 800 includes a base body 802 that accommodates various members, and a plurality of wiring connection portions 804 formed on the base body 802.

  As shown in FIG. 63, the wiring connecting portion 804 includes a terminal plate 808 electrically connected to the wiring 806, a swing operation member 810 that operates electrical connection between the wiring 806 and the terminal plate 808, and a swing A coil spring 812 that urges the operation member 810 toward the terminal plate 808 is configured.

An opening 814 into which the wiring 806 is inserted is formed on the front surface of the base 802.
The terminal plate 808 extends in parallel with the direction in which the wiring 806 is inserted, and is fixed to the inner wall of the base 802. Then, one end of the terminal plate 808 protrudes below the base 802 through a slit hole formed in the base 802, and constitutes an output terminal To.

  One end of the swing operation member 810 is supported on the inner wall of the base 802 so as to be swingable. The other end of the swing operation member 810 protrudes forward from an opening formed in the base 802 to form a push operation unit 824. A pressing portion 828 that makes the wiring 806 contact the terminal plate 808 is formed between both ends of the swing operation member 810.

  The coil spring 812 is disposed between the swing operation member 810 and the inner wall of the base 802. The swing operation member 810 is urged by the coil spring 812 in the direction in which the pressing portion 828 contacts the terminal plate 808.

  In a state where the swing operation member 810 is urged by the coil spring 812, the opening 814 is closed by the pressing portion 828, and the wiring 806 cannot be inserted. On the other hand, by swinging the swing operation member 810 in the direction indicated by the arrow in FIG. 63 against the elastic force of the coil spring 812, the opening 814 is opened and the wiring 806 can be inserted. The wiring 806 inserted from the opening 814 is sandwiched between the pressing portion 828 and the terminal plate 808 by the elastic force of the coil spring 812 and is electrically connected to the terminal plate 808.

JP 2004-350926 A

  However, in the conventional technique as exemplified above, if the entire width of the connection terminal device 800 is to be shortened, the width of each wiring connection portion 804 must be shortened. There was a problem of difficulty.

  The present invention has been made paying attention to the unsolved problems and the like of the conventional technology as exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which wiring connection is easy.

The gaming machine according to claim 1 is:
A connection terminal device having a base body and a plurality of wiring connection portions formed on the base body, winning means for allowing a game ball to enter when a predetermined lottery is won, and winning means of the winning means A gaming machine comprising winning control means for controlling operation and output control means for controlling information output from the plurality of wiring connection parts,
The wiring connection portion is
An opening formed on the upper surface of the substrate and into which wiring is inserted;
A terminal portion electrically connected to the wiring;
A swing operation member in which one end portion is swingably supported by the base body, a push operation portion is formed at the other end portion, and a press portion for pressing the wiring inserted from the opening portion against the terminal portion is formed. And
One of the wiring connection portions is arranged with respect to the other wiring connection portions so that the push operation portions are arranged side by side, and in the direction along the lower surface of the base body, The length from the swing shaft portion of the swing operation member to the tip of the push operation portion is set to be different from the length from the swing shaft portion to the tip of the push operation portion in the other wiring connection portion. Connection terminal device is provided,
The connection terminal device includes a wiring connection unit that outputs predetermined information when the predetermined lottery is won,
The winning control means causes the winning means to perform a long opening operation that is released for a predetermined time when a predetermined number of game balls do not enter and a short opening operation that is released for a shorter time than the predetermined time. ,
The output control means, when winning the lottery in which the long release operation is executed after the short release operation is executed by the predetermined lottery, after the short release operation is executed a predetermined number of times, or The predetermined information is output at the end of execution of the predetermined number of short opening operations.

  According to the gaming machine according to the first and second aspects, the effect that the wiring can be easily connected can be obtained.

It is a figure which shows the structure of the management system of a pachinko machine. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10. FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the pachinko machine 10 is unfolded with the main body frame 13 and the front door frame 14 spread apart. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the pachinko machine 10 is unfolded with the main body frame 13 and the back pack unit 15 spread apart. 3 is a front view of the back pack unit 15. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a configuration of an external terminal plate 213. FIG. 5 is a plan view of a connection terminal device 600. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of a connection terminal device 600. FIG. FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A ′ in FIG. 7. FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A ′ in FIG. 7, showing a state where the push operation unit 624 a is pushed. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view taken along line C-C ′ in FIG. 9. It is a perspective view of the terminal board 608a. FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view taken along line B-B ′ in FIG. 7. FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view taken along line B-B ′ in FIG. 7, showing a state where the push operation unit 624 b is pushed. 2 is a front view of a game board 81. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a control system 300. FIG. It is drawing for demonstrating the display screen of the production symbol display apparatus 91. FIG. It is a figure showing a jackpot type. It is a figure which shows the buffer for a counter of RAM (Random AccessMemory) 314, and a storage area for storage balls. It is a figure which shows the classification of a command. It is a figure which shows a part of data structure of the distribution structure table 404. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a data structure of a fluctuation pattern table 406. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing NMI (Non Maskable Interrupt) interrupt processing executed by main controller 162. 4 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by main controller 162. 3 is a flowchart showing a start winning process executed by a main controller 162. 4 is a flowchart showing start-up processing executed by main controller 162. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by main controller 162. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol control process performed with the main controller 162. 5 is a flowchart showing a change start process executed by main controller 162. 7 is a flowchart showing a special winning opening / closing process executed by the main controller 162. 7 is a flowchart showing a special winning opening / closing process executed by the main controller 162. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 143. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed with the audio lamp control apparatus 143. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed with the audio lamp control apparatus 143. 3 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a display control device 302. FIG. It is a figure which shows a part of data structure of the distribution structure table 408. FIG. 11 shows a data structure of an effect data table 410. It is a flowchart which shows the command interruption process performed with the display control apparatus 302. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the V interruption process performed with the display control apparatus 302. FIG. 4 is a flowchart illustrating main processing executed by the display control device 302. 3 is a front view of a call lamp device 500. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a control system of a call lamp device 500. FIG. It is a time chart which shows the jackpot production corresponding to a non-probable variation jackpot and a probability variation jackpot. It is a figure which shows the screen of the production symbol display apparatus 91. FIG. It is a time chart which shows the jackpot production corresponding to JUB (Jump Up Bonus) jackpot. It is a time chart which shows the jackpot production corresponding to a surprise jackpot. It is a time chart which shows the jackpot production corresponding to a latent jackpot. It is a time chart which shows a small hit effect. 4 is a flowchart showing an external output process executed by main controller 162. 7 is a flowchart showing a special winning opening / closing process executed by the main controller 162. 5 is a plan view of a connection terminal device 600. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of a connection terminal device 600. FIG. FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view taken along line E-E ′ in FIG. 51. FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view taken along line E-E ′ in FIG. 51, showing a state where the push operation unit 624 c is pushed. FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view taken along line F-F ′ in FIG. 51. FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view taken along line F-F ′ in FIG. 51, showing a state where the push operation unit 624 d is pushed. 5 is a plan view of a connection terminal device 600. FIG. FIG. 58 is a cross-sectional view taken along line G-G ′ in FIG. 57. It is sectional drawing along the G-G 'line | wire in FIG. 57 which shows the state which pushed in the pushing operation part 624e. It is sectional drawing along the H-H 'line | wire in FIG. It is sectional drawing along the H-H 'line in FIG. 57 which shows the state which pushed in the pushing operation part 624f. It is a top view of the conventional connection terminal device 800. FIG. 63 is a cross-sectional view along the line D-D ′ in FIG. 62.

First, other means for solving the above-described problems will be described, and then embodiments will be described.
[Invention 1] In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine of Invention 1 comprises:
A gaming machine comprising a connection terminal device having a base and a plurality of wiring connection portions formed on the base,
The wiring connection portion is
An opening formed in the base and into which wiring is inserted;
A terminal portion electrically connected to the wiring;
A swing operation member in which one end portion is swingably supported by the base body, a push operation portion is formed at the other end portion, and a press portion that presses the wiring inserted from the opening portion against the terminal portion is formed. And
One of the wiring connection portions is arranged adjacent to the other wiring connection portions so that the push operation portions are arranged side by side, and the length in the direction toward the tip of the push operation portion in the wiring connection portions The length is set to be different from the length in the direction toward the tip of the push-in operation portion in the other wiring connection portion.

  With such a configuration, when the push-in operation unit is pushed in, the swing operation member swings around the one end. When the wiring is inserted from the opening, the wiring is sandwiched between the pressing portion and the terminal portion and is electrically connected to the terminal portion.

  At this time, since the two wiring connecting portions are arranged so that the pushing operation portions are arranged side by side, and the lengths in the direction toward the tip of the pushing operation portion in the wiring connecting portions are set to be different, the connection terminal device Even if the overall width of the wiring board is reduced (including increasing the number of wiring connecting portions while maintaining the width of the connection terminal device; the same applies hereinafter), the wiring can be easily connected.

  Here, the one end portion is a concept including one end and its periphery. The other end is a concept including the other end and its periphery.

  Further, the terminal portion only needs to be electrically connected to the wiring, and may be plate-shaped like a terminal plate, or may be linear like a wiring. In addition, it may be rod-shaped like a protrusion.

[Invention 2] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention 2 is the gaming machine of Invention 1,
Furthermore, it is provided with the urging means which urges | biases the said rocking | fluctuation operation member in the direction in which the said press part contacts the said terminal part.

  With such a configuration, when the pushing operation portion is pushed against the urging force of the urging means, the oscillating operation member oscillates around the one end. Then, when the wiring is inserted from the opening and the drag to the urging means is released, the wiring is sandwiched between the pressing part and the terminal part by the urging force of the urging means, and is electrically connected to the terminal part. Is done.

  Here, the biasing means includes, for example, an elastic body. Examples of the elastic body include coil springs, leaf springs and other springs, urethane rubber, silicon rubber and other rubbers, and sponges.

  As described above, according to the gaming machine of the first aspect of the present invention, the two wiring connecting portions are arranged so that the pushing operation portions are arranged side by side, and the length of the wiring connecting portions in the direction toward the tip of the pushing operation portion is small. Since they are set differently, even if the overall width of the connection terminal device is reduced, the effect of facilitating the connection of the wiring can be obtained as compared with the conventional case.

  Furthermore, according to the gaming machine of the second aspect, the wiring is sandwiched between the pressing portion and the terminal portion by the urging force of the urging means, so that the wiring and the terminal portion can be more reliably connected. An effect is obtained.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. 1 to 48 are diagrams showing a first embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention.

In this embodiment, the gaming machine according to the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine.
First, the configuration of the pachinko machine management system will be described.

FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a management system for a pachinko machine.
In the pachinko hall, there is a pachinko machine installation island for installing pachinko machines. On the pachinko machine installation island, as shown in FIG. 1, a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed with their backs facing each other.

  Above each pachinko machine 10, a call lamp device 500 is installed for calling employees of the pachinko hall. In addition to the calling function, the calling lamp device 500 displays the number of jackpots, the number of times that the winning probability of the jackpot lottery is higher than the normal state (hereinafter referred to as the probability variation state), the number of symbol variations, and other game information. It has the function to do.

  The pachinko machine 10 is connected to a calling lamp device 500 installed above the own machine. The calling lamp device 500 is connected to an external terminal board (described later: 213) of the pachinko machine 10.

  The ringing lamp device 500 is connected to the hub 520. A plurality of call lamp devices 500 are connected to the hub 520.

  Hub 520 is connected to hub 522. A plurality of hubs 520 are connected to the hub 522. The hub 522 is connected to the hall computer 530. Thereby, each pachinko machine 10 is connected to the hall computer 530 via the calling lamp device 500 and the hubs 520 and 520. The hall computer 530 is installed in a pachinko hall management room or the like, and monitors the gaming state of each pachinko machine 10 based on an output signal from the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described.
FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10.
FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state where the pachinko machine 10 is unfolded with the main body frame 13 and the front door frame 14 spread apart. In FIG. 3, the configuration in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

  FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing a state in which the pachinko machine 10 is unfolded with the main body frame 13 and the back pack unit 15 spread apart.

  As shown in FIGS. 2 to 4, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main part 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11. It is comprised. The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting wooden plates to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a ball lending device (for example, CR unit) Y is provided on the side of the outer frame 11. A card insertion slot H is provided on the front side of the ball lending device Y so that a number of game balls corresponding to the amount stored in the card can be lent by inserting the card into the card insertion slot H. It has become.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the gaming machine main part 12 includes a main body frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the main body frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the main body frame 13. And is configured. The main body frame 13 of the gaming machine main part 12 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the main body frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation axis side and the right side as the rotation turning side in front view.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the main body frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation shaft side and the right side as a rotation swivel side in a front view. Has been. As shown in FIG. 4, the backpack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the main body frame 13, and when viewed from the front, the left side is a rotation axis side and the right side is a rotation rotation side, and the rear pack unit 15 is rotated rearward. It is possible.

Next, the configuration of the front door frame 14 will be described.
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the main body frame 13. The front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 21 so that almost the entire game area can be viewed from the front. The window portion 21 has a substantially oval shape and is fitted with a transparent glass 22.

As shown in FIG. 2, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the window portion 21. For example, an annular illumination part 23 incorporating a light emitting means such as an LED is provided along the periphery of the window part 21. In the annular illumination part 23, lighting or blinking is performed in accordance with a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach. In addition, an error display lamp unit 24 that is turned on at the time of a predetermined error is provided at the center of the annular illumination unit 23 and at the top of the pachinko machine 10. Further, on the left and right sides, a prize ball lamp unit 25 that is lit during the prize ball payout is provided. In addition, a speaker unit 26 is provided at a position close to the left and right prize ball lamp units 25 to output a sound effect or the like corresponding to the gaming state.

  Below the window portion 21 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 31 and a lower bulging portion 32 that bulge to the near side are provided side by side. An upper plate 33 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 31. Inside the lower bulging portion 32, a lower plate 34 that is also open upward is provided. The upper plate 33 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device (described later: 224) and guiding them to the game ball launching device (described later: 110) side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 34 has a function of storing game balls that become surplus in the upper tray 33.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the window portion 21, the upper plate 33, and the lower plate 34 are integrated with the front door frame 14. In the conventional pachinko machine, at least the window part and the lower plate are provided as separate units, and the window part can be rotated independently with respect to the lower plate. There was a boundary between the units. In this case, an illegal act performed by inserting a fraudulent jig or the like from the boundary is assumed. In addition, a fraud suppression structure can be provided at the boundary between the units in order to suppress such fraud, but this leads to a complicated configuration. Further, it is not preferable in design that a boundary is generated in the front portion of the pachinko machine. On the other hand, as described above, since the window portion 21, the upper plate 33, and the lower plate 34 are integrated with the front door frame 14, a boundary is generated between the window portion 21 and the lower plate 34. No, the above inconvenience is suppressed.

  The upper bulging portion 31 is provided with a ball lending operation device 36. The ball lending operation device 36 is provided with a ball lending button 37, a return button 38, and a frequency display unit 39. With a card or the like inserted into the ball lending device Y, the ball lending operation device 36 can perform a ball lending operation, a card return operation, and confirmation of the card frequency. That is, the ball lending button 37 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is paid out as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. The return button 38 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the ball lending apparatus Y. The frequency display unit 39 displays remaining amount information such as a card.

  The upper bulging portion 31 is further provided with an operation button 35 that can be operated by the player. The operation button 35 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the effect content of the variable display performed by the effect symbol display device (described later: 91) or changing the effect content at the time of reach.

  A game ball launching handle 41 is provided on the right side of the lower bulging portion 32 so as to protrude toward the front side. By operating the game ball launch handle 41, a game ball is launched from a game ball launch device (described later: 110).

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 15 will be described.
FIG. 5 is a front view of the back pack unit 15.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 201.

The back pack 201 is formed of a synthetic resin having transparency, and includes a base portion 211 to which the payout mechanism portion 202 and the like are attached, and a protective cover portion 212 that protrudes rearward from the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. Configured.

  The protective cover portion 212 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is opened, and has a size sufficient to surround at least the variable display unit (described later: 86).

  The base portion 211 is provided with an external terminal plate 213 at the upper right portion thereof. The external terminal plate 213 is provided with a plurality of output terminals, and various signals are output to the management control device on the game hall side through these output terminals.

  The base portion 211 is provided with a main body frame opening switch 217 that detects whether or not the main body frame 13 is opened (or closed) outside the external terminal plate 213. In a state where the main body frame 13 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the metal contact of the main body frame opening switch 217 is closed and the closing of the main body frame 13 is detected, and in a state where the main body frame 13 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11, The metal contact is opened and the opening of the main body frame 13 is detected.

  The main body frame opening switch 217 outputs a main body frame opening signal to the main control device (described later: 162) when the main body frame 13 is in an open state, and when the main body frame 13 is in a closed state, the main body frame is opened. Stop signal output. Specifically, a LOW level signal is output when the main body frame 13 is open, and a HIGH level signal is output when the main body frame 13 is closed. The present invention is not limited to this, and a high level signal may be output when the main body frame 13 is open, and a low level signal may be output when the main body frame 13 is closed. . Moreover, it is good also as a structure which outputs an electrical signal only in the state in which the main body frame 13 is open | released.

  The base portion 211 is further provided with a pair of upper and lower latch pins 214 at the right end when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10. The back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported with respect to the main body frame 13 by inserting the latch pins 214 through bearings (not shown) provided in the main body frame 13. Further, the base portion 211 is provided with a fastener 215 for fastening to a fastening hole (not shown) provided in the main body frame 13. The back pack unit 15 is fixed to the main body frame 13 by fitting the fastener 215 into the fastening hole.

  The base portion 211 is further provided with a payout mechanism portion 202 so as to bypass the protective cover portion 212. That is, a tank 221 that opens upward is provided at the top of the back pack 201. The game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially supplied to the tank 221. Below the tank 221, a tank rail 222 that is gently inclined toward the downstream side is connected. A case rail 223 extending in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 222. A payout device 224 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 223.

  The case rail 223 is provided with a ball non-detection sensor 223a so as to detect a game ball connected from the tank 221 to the payout device 224 through a passage in the case rail 223. The ball non-detection sensor 223a is configured by a magnetic detection type proximity sensor, and detects a change in the magnetic field when the game ball passes through the detection range and outputs it as an electrical signal. The ball non-detection sensor 223a is not limited to a magnetic detection type proximity sensor, and may be any as long as it can detect a game ball. For example, a photo sensor or a limit sensor may be used. Good.

The ball non-detection sensor 223a outputs an electrical signal to the payout control device 242. Specifically, a LOW level signal is output when a game ball is not detected, and a HIGH level signal is output when a game ball is detected. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and a high level signal may be output when a game ball is not detected, and a LOW level signal may be output when a game ball is detected. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which outputs an electrical signal only in the state which is detecting the game ball.

  The payout control device 242 determines whether or not the tank 221 is in a no-ball state based on the detection result of the no-ball detection sensor 223a. Specifically, when the non-detection state of the game ball in the ball non-detection sensor 223a is continued until a predetermined period elapses, it is determined that the tank 221 is in the no-ball state. When it is determined by the payout control device 242 that the tank 221 is in the absence of a ball, the payout of the game ball by the payout device 224 is stopped. This prevents the dispensing device 224 from continuing to operate even though the tank 221 is in the absence of a ball. The stop of the payout operation is canceled when the ball 221 in the tank 221 is released and the game ball is detected by the ball non-detection sensor 223a. Further, when it is determined in the dispensing control device 242 that the tank 221 is in the absence of a ball, a notification process corresponding to that is executed. In addition, when a ball clogging occurs in the tank 221 and the game ball does not flow to the payout device 224 side, it is determined that there is no ball.

  The case rail 223 is provided with a ball removal switch 223b. For example, when the game balls stored in the tank 221 are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10, the ball removal switch 223b is pushed to discharge all the game balls on the case rail 223, and the case rail 223 and its downstream side The game balls stored in the game can be discharged. Note that the installation location of the ball removal switch 223b is not limited to the case rail 223, and may be installed, for example, in the payout control device 242.

  In the payout device 224, game balls are paid out. The paid-out game balls are detected by a pay-out ball detection sensor 258 provided in a passage on the exit side. Then, it is supplied to the game ball distribution unit 225 provided in the base part 211 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 224.

  A backpack substrate 229 is installed in the dispensing mechanism unit 202. The back pack substrate 229 is supplied with, for example, a main power of 24 volts AC and is turned on or off by a switching operation of the power switch 229a.

  A control device assembly unit 204 is attached to the lower end portion of the base portion 211 so as to sandwich the lower end portion in the front-rear direction.

  The control device assembly unit 204 is configured to have a horizontally long mounting base 241. On the mounting base 241, a payout control device 242, a power source and launch control device 243, and a ball rental connection terminal plate 249 are mounted. The payout control device 242, the power and launch control device 243, and the ball lending connection terminal plate 249 have the payout control device 242 and the ball lend connection terminal plate 249 behind the pachinko machine 10, and the power supply and launch control device 243 as the pachinko machine. 10 are placed one on top of the other so as to be in front of 10.

The payout control device 242 includes a payout control board that controls the payout device 224. The payout control board is accommodated in a colorless and transparent board box 244. The payout command signal from the payout control device 242 to the payout device 224 is relayed by the back pack substrate 229. In addition, the payout control device 242 is provided with a state return switch 245. For example, when the state return switch 245 is pressed when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout device 224, the ball jam is eliminated. A 7-segment display 242a is mounted on the payout control board. By opening the main body frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11, the display content of the 7-segment display 242a can be visually recognized through the substrate box 244.

  The power source and launch control device 243 includes a power source and launch control board that generates predetermined power required by various control devices and the like, and controls the launch of the game ball in accordance with the operation of the game ball launch handle 41. Has been. The power supply and launch control board is housed in a board box 246.

  The power supply and launch control device 243 is provided with a RAM erase switch 247. The pachinko machine 10 has a function for storing various data, and even if a power failure occurs, the pachinko machine 10 can maintain the state at the time of the power failure, and can return to the state at the time of the power failure when returning from the power failure. ing. Therefore, for example, if the power is turned off in the normal procedure as in the case of the game hall being closed, the state before the turn-off is stored and held, but if the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 247, the data in the RAM is saved. It is supposed to be initialized.

  The ball lending connection terminal plate 249 is electrically connected to the ball lending device Y, the payout control device 242 and the ball lending operation device 36, and mainly takes in a command for a ball lending operation by a player and supplies it to the payout control device 242. Output.

Next, the configuration of the external terminal plate 213 will be described.
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the external terminal plate 213.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the external terminal plate 213 includes 10 input terminals Ti <b> 1 to Ti <b> 10 and a connection terminal device 600 attached on the external terminal plate 213. Various signals from the main controller 162 are input to the input terminals Ti1 to Ti10, respectively. In FIG. 6, only four of the ten input terminals are displayed and the others are omitted.

  The connection terminal device 600 includes two output terminals To1a and To1b corresponding to the input terminal Ti1. Similarly, it has two output terminals To2a to To10a and To2b to To10b corresponding to the input terminals Ti2 to Ti10, respectively.

  For the input terminal Ti1 and the output terminals To1a, To1b, the external terminal plate 213 is further connected to the resistance element R1a having one end connected to the input terminal Ti1, the anode connected to the other end of the resistance element R1a, and the cathode grounded It has light emitting diode PD1. Furthermore, the resistance element R1b whose one end is connected to the output terminal To1a, the phototransistor Tr1 whose collector terminal is connected to the other end of the resistance element R1b, one end connected to the emitter terminal of the phototransistor Tr1, and the other end outputting And a resistor element R1c connected to the terminal To1b. The light emitting diode PD1 and the phototransistor Tr1 are configured as a photocoupler. As a result, one-way communication is performed from the main control device 162 to the outside, and it is difficult to input a signal to the main control device 162 from the outside, so that the possibility of fraudulent acts can be reduced.

  Each set of input terminals Ti2 to Ti10 and output terminals To2a to To10a, To2b to To10b is configured in the same manner as the input terminal Ti1 and the output terminals To1a and To1b.

Next, the configuration of the connection terminal device 600 will be described.
FIG. 7 is a plan view of the connection terminal device 600.

FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the connection terminal device 600.
As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the connection terminal device 600 includes a base body 60 in which various members are accommodated.
2, ten wiring connection portions 604 a formed on the base body 602, and ten wiring connection portions 604 b formed on the base body 602.

  The wiring connection portions 604a are arranged to face each other in pairs. Output terminals To2a and To2b are respectively provided in the leftmost group of the wiring connection portions 604a arranged to face each other. Similarly, in the other groups, even-numbered output terminals To4a and To4b, output terminals To6a and To6b, output terminals To8a and To8b, and output terminals To10a and To10b are provided in this order from the left side.

  The wiring connection portions 604b face each other in pairs and are alternately arranged with the wiring connection portions 604a. Output terminals To1a and To1b are respectively provided in the leftmost group of the wiring connection portions 604b arranged to face each other. Similarly, odd-numbered output terminals To3a and To3b, output terminals To5a and To5b, output terminals To7a and To7b, and output terminals To9a and To9b are provided in the other sets in order from the left side.

  The wiring connection portions 604a and 604b arranged to face each other are colored in the same color. Thereby, since it becomes easy to identify the wiring connection part 604a or the wiring connection part 604b to be a pair, the possibility of erroneous connection of wirings can be reduced. On the other hand, the wiring connection portions 604a and 604b arranged adjacent to each other are colored in different colors. As a result, the adjacent wiring connection portions 604a and 604b can be easily distinguished from each other, so that the possibility of erroneous connection of wirings can be further reduced. Further, the wiring connection portions 604a and 604b are colored in different colors in other combinations in the adjacent direction. For example, in order from the left end, purple, yellow, brown, red, gray, green, black, blue, orange, and pink are colored. Thereby, since it becomes easy to distinguish each wiring connection part 604a, 604b, possibility that a wiring will be mistakenly connected can further be reduced.

Next, the configuration of the wiring connection portion 604a will be described.
FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA ′ in FIG.

  FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A ′ in FIG. 7, showing a state where the push operation unit 624 a is pushed.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the wiring connection portion 604a includes a terminal plate 608a that is electrically connected to the wiring 606a, and a swing operation member 610a that operates electrical connection between the wiring 606a and the terminal plate 608a. And a coil spring 612a for biasing the swing operation member 610a toward the terminal plate 608a.

  The base 602 is formed using an electrical insulator such as a synthetic resin as a material, and is formed into a hollow block shape. That is, the wiring connection part 604a arranged opposite to the wiring connection part 604b arranged adjacent to each other is partitioned by the partition wall.

  An opening 614a into which the wiring 606a is inserted is formed on the upper surface 602e of the base 602. The base body 602 has a notch 616a for projecting a part of the swing operation member 610a forward of the base body 602 from the upper surface 602e to the front surface 602b. On the other hand, the lower surface 602f of the base 602 is formed with a slit hole 618a for projecting one end portion of the terminal plate 608a below the base 602, and a locking pin 620a for locking the coil spring 612a is formed inward. It is provided for.

  A pair of swing bearing recesses (not shown) for swinging the swing operation member 610a is formed on the inner walls of the base 602 on the left and right side surfaces 602c and 602d (FIG. 7).

  The terminal plate 608a is formed, for example, by punching a conductive metal plate. The terminal plate 608a extends from the upper surface 602e to the lower surface 602f of the base 602 in parallel with the direction in which the wiring 606a is inserted, and is fixed to the inner wall of the back surface 602a of the base 602. Further, one end of the terminal plate 608a protrudes below the base 602 through the slit hole 618a to constitute an output terminal To8a.

  The swing operation member 610a is made of, for example, a synthetic resin. The swing operation member 610a has a swing support shaft 622a formed at one end thereof, and the swing support shaft 622a is supported by a swing bearing recess (not shown) so as to be swingably supported by the base 602. ing. The other end portion of the swing operation member 610a protrudes forward from the notch hole 616a to constitute a push operation portion 624a.

  A claw 626a that protrudes upward is formed at the upper end of the push operation portion 624a. Thereby, since it is only necessary to put the finger on the nail 626a and push the push operation part 624a, the push operation part 624a becomes easy to operate.

  A pressing portion 628a for bringing the wiring 606a into contact with the terminal plate 608a is formed on the side surface between both end portions of the swing operation member 610a and facing the terminal plate 608a. In addition, a valley 630a that is recessed inward is formed between the pressing portion 628a and the swing support shaft 622a. Thereby, when the swing operation member 610a is swung downward, a space is formed between the pressing portion 628a and the terminal plate 608a, and therefore the wiring 606a can be easily inserted.

  On the other hand, between the both ends of the swing operation member 610a and on the side surface facing the front surface 602b of the base body 602, a locking projection 632a that locks the coil spring 612a and a regulation portion 634a that regulates the expansion and contraction direction of the coil spring 612a. And are formed.

  The coil spring 612a is disposed between the swing operation member 610a and the inner wall of the lower surface 602f of the base body 602. One end of the coil spring 612a is locked to the locking pin 620a, and the other end of the coil spring 612a is locked to the locking projection 632a. The swing operation member 610a is urged by the coil spring 612a in a direction in which the pressing portion 628a contacts the terminal plate 608a. The coil spring 612a can appropriately bias the swing operation member 610a toward the terminal plate 608a by restricting the expansion / contraction operation thereof by the restriction portion 634a. The coil spring 612a may be replaced with, for example, a leaf spring as long as it has compression elasticity.

  In a state where the swing operation member 610a is biased by the coil spring 612a, as shown in FIG. 9, the opening 614a is closed by the pressing portion 628a, and the wiring 606a cannot be inserted.

FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC ′ in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 11, the swing operation member 610 a is formed such that a portion closer to the pressing operation portion 624 a than the pressing portion 628 a is formed. Correspondingly, the base 602 is formed with a passage 636a having the same width as the pressing portion 628a and a passage 638a having the same width as the pressing operation portion 624a side of the pressing portion 628a. The passages 636a and 638a are continuous.

In a state where the swing operation member 610a is biased by the coil spring 612a, the swing operation member 610a is fitted in the passages 636a and 638a. At this time, the swing operation member 610a abuts on the tip surface of the passage 638a at a position where the tip of the pressing portion 628a is close to the terminal plate 608a, and further movement toward the terminal plate 608a is restricted. That is, passage 636a
, 638a function as a stopper. Thereby, the possibility that the wiring 606a is excessively pressed and damaged can be reduced.

  The tip of the pressing portion 628a and the terminal plate 608a are close enough that the pressing portion 628a slightly presses the wiring 606a in a state where the wiring 606a is in contact with the terminal plate 608a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pressing portion 628a may be configured to contact the tip surface of the passage 638a at a position where the tip of the pressing portion 628a contacts the terminal plate 608a.

Next, the configuration of the terminal plate 608a will be described.
FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the terminal plate 608a.

  An electrode 640a that bends forward is formed at the center of the upper end of the terminal plate 608a. Accordingly, the wiring 606a can easily come into contact with the electrode 640a, so that the wiring 606a and the terminal plate 608a can be more reliably connected.

  Claws 642a projecting upward are formed on both ends of the electrode 640a at the upper end of the terminal plate 608a. Each claw 642a is fitted in a fitting hole (not shown) formed in the inner wall of the upper surface 602e of the base body 602. Thereby, even if the electrode 640a is formed on the upper end portion of the terminal plate 608a, the terminal plate 608a can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction.

  A tongue-like member 644a is formed at the center of the rising portion of the terminal plate 608a so as to protrude obliquely downward. The tongue-like member 644a is fitted in a fitting hole (not shown) formed in the inner wall of the back surface 602a of the base body 602. Thereby, it can control that terminal board 608a moves to the direction of order.

  Three comb electrodes 646a and 648a are formed below the terminal plate 608a. The center electrode 646a extends forward and hangs down to constitute an output terminal To8a. The left and right electrodes 648a extend obliquely upward in the front direction. Each electrode 648a is installed on a protrusion (not shown) formed on the inner wall of the base 602 on the left and right side surfaces 602c, 602d (FIG. 7) side. Thereby, it can control that terminal board 608a moves below.

Next, an operation of connecting the wiring 606a to the wiring connection portion 604a will be described.
When connecting the wiring 606a to the wiring connection portion 604a, as shown in FIG. 10, first, a finger is put on the claw 626a to push the push operation portion 624a downward. As a result, the swing operation member 610a swings downward against the elastic force of the coil spring 612a, the pressing portion 628a closing the opening 614a moves forward, and the opening 614a is opened. In addition, a space is formed between the pressing portion 628a and the terminal plate 608a by the swing of the swing operation member 610a.

  When the wiring 606a is inserted from the opening 614a and the drag to the coil spring 612a is released, the swing operation member 610a swings upward by the elastic force of the coil spring 612a as shown in FIG. 9, and the pressing portion 628a. Moves to the terminal plate 608a side. The inserted wiring 606a is pressed by the pressing portion 628a so as to contact the terminal plate 608a. Thereby, the wiring 606a and the terminal board 608a are electrically connected.

Next, the configuration of the wiring connection portion 604b will be described.
FIG. 13 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB ′ in FIG.

  FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view taken along line B-B ′ in FIG. 7, showing a state where the push operation unit 624 b is pushed.

  As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the wiring connection portion 604b includes a terminal plate 608b that is electrically connected to the wiring 606b, and a swing operation member 610b that operates electrical connection between the wiring 606b and the terminal plate 608b. And a coil spring 612b that urges the swing operation member 610b toward the terminal plate 608b.

  An opening 614b into which the wiring 606b is inserted is formed on the upper surface 602e of the base 602. Further, the base 602 has a notch hole 616b for projecting a part of the swing operation member 610b forward of the base 602 from the upper surface 602e to the front surface 602b. On the other hand, the lower surface 602f of the base 602 is formed with a slit hole 618b for projecting one end portion of the terminal plate 608b below the base 602, and a locking pin 620b for locking the coil spring 612b is formed inward. It is provided for.

  A pair of swing bearing recesses (not shown) for swinging the swing operation member 610b is formed on the inner walls of the base 602 on the left and right side surfaces 602c and 602d (FIG. 7).

  The terminal plate 608b is formed by punching a conductive metal plate, for example. The terminal plate 608b extends from the upper surface 602e to the lower surface 602f of the base body 602 in parallel with the direction in which the wiring 606b is inserted, and is fixed to the inner wall of the back surface 602a of the base body 602. One end of the terminal plate 608b protrudes below the base body 602 through the slit hole 618b, and constitutes an output terminal To7a.

  The swing operation member 610b is made of, for example, a synthetic resin. The swing operation member 610b has a swing support shaft 622b formed at one end thereof, and the swing support shaft 622b is supported by the base 602 so as to be swingable by being supported by a swing bearing recess (not shown). ing. The other end portion of the swing operation member 610b protrudes forward from the notch hole 616b to constitute a push operation portion 624b.

  The height of the push operation unit 624b is set higher than that of the push operation unit 624a. Thereby, even if the overall width of the connection terminal device 600 is reduced, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the adjacent pushing operation unit 624a is pushed in at the same time, so that the wiring 606b can be easily connected.

  The length in the direction (front-rear direction) toward the tip of the push operation unit 624b is set shorter than the push operation unit 624a. Thereby, even if the overall width of the connection terminal device 600 is reduced, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the adjacent push operation unit 624a is accidentally pushed in at the same time, so that the connection of the wiring 606b is further facilitated.

  A claw 626b protruding upward is formed at the upper end of the push operation portion 624b. Accordingly, it is only necessary to put the finger on the nail 626b and push the push operation unit 624b, so that the push operation unit 624b is easily operated.

  Further, the height of the claw 626b is set higher than that of the claw 626a. As a result, it is difficult to put a finger on the pushing operation portion 624b having a short length in the front-rear direction. However, since the height of the nail 626b is higher than that of the nail 626a, it becomes easier to put the finger on the nail 626b. It becomes easy to operate.

A pressing portion 628b for bringing the wiring 606b into contact with the terminal plate 608b is formed between the both ends of the swing operation member 610b and facing the terminal plate 608b. Further, a valley portion 630b that is recessed inward is formed between the pressing portion 628b and the swing support shaft 622b. Accordingly, when the swing operation member 610b is swung downward, a space is formed between the pressing portion 628b and the terminal plate 608b, and therefore the wiring 606b can be easily inserted.

  On the other hand, between the both ends of the swing operation member 610b and on the side surface facing the front surface 602b of the base body 602, a locking projection 632b that locks the coil spring 612b and a regulation portion 634b that regulates the expansion and contraction direction of the coil spring 612b. And are formed.

  The coil spring 612b is disposed between the swing operation member 610b and the inner wall of the lower surface 602f of the base body 602. One end of the coil spring 612b is locked to the locking pin 620b, and the other end of the coil spring 612b is locked to the locking projection 632b. The swing operation member 610b is urged by the coil spring 612b in a direction in which the pressing portion 628b contacts the terminal plate 608b. The coil spring 612b can appropriately bias the swing operation member 610b toward the terminal plate 608b by restricting the expansion / contraction operation thereof by the restricting portion 634b. The coil spring 612b may be replaced with, for example, a leaf spring as long as it has compression elasticity.

  In a state where the swing operation member 610b is biased by the coil spring 612b, the opening 614b is closed by the pressing portion 628b so that the wiring 606b cannot be inserted as shown in FIG.

  Note that the wiring connection portion 604b also has a cross-sectional structure as shown in FIG. 11 in the same manner as the wiring connection portion 604a. Similarly to the terminal plate 608a, the terminal plate 608b has a structure as shown in FIG.

Next, an operation of connecting the wiring 606b to the wiring connection portion 604b will be described.
When connecting the wiring 606b to the wiring connecting portion 604b, as shown in FIG. 14, first, a finger is put on the claw 626b to push the pushing operation portion 624b downward. As a result, the swing operation member 610b swings downward against the elastic force of the coil spring 612b, the pressing portion 628b closing the opening 614b moves forward, and the opening 614b is opened. In addition, a space is formed between the pressing portion 628b and the terminal plate 608b by the swing of the swing operation member 610b.

  When the wiring 606b is inserted from the opening 614b and the drag to the coil spring 612b is released, the swing operation member 610b swings upward by the elastic force of the coil spring 612b as shown in FIG. 13, and the pressing portion 628b. Moves to the terminal plate 608b side. The inserted wiring 606b is pressed by the pressing portion 628b so as to contact the terminal plate 608b. Thereby, the wiring 606b and the terminal plate 608b are electrically connected.

Next, the configuration of the game board 81 will be described.
FIG. 15 is a front view of the game board 81.
As shown in FIG. 15, the game board 81 includes a wooden base plate 81a cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails 88 for guiding a game ball, windmills, rails 101 and 102, a general winning opening 82, A variable winning device 83, a start winning port 84, a variable display unit 86, and the like are assembled. And the peripheral part of the game board 81 is attached to the back surface side of the main body frame 13. FIG. The general winning port 82, the variable winning device 83, the starting winning port 84, and the variable display unit 86 are provided in a through hole formed in the base plate 81a by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 81 with wood screws or the like. Yes. The front center portion of the game board 81 can be viewed from the front side of the front door frame 14 through the window portion 21.

An inner rail 10 formed by bending a belt-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape on the front surface of the game board 81.
1 is provided. Similarly, an outer rail 102 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is provided on the outer side of the inner rail 101. The inner rail 101 and the outer rail 102 are arranged with an interval through which a game ball can pass. Between the lower right tip of the inner rail 101 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 102, a resin arc member 103 formed by providing an arc on the inner surface side is provided. The arc member 103 is fixed by being driven into the base plate 81a. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 81 is surrounded by the rails 101 and 102, and the front and rear are surrounded by the base plate 81a and the glass 22, so that a game area where a game is played is formed on the front surface of the game board 81 by the behavior of the game ball Is done. The game area is a substantially circular area formed on the front surface of the game board 81 and defined by the rails 101 and 102 and the arc member 103.

  The rails 101 and 102 are for guiding a game ball launched from a game ball launching device (described later: 110) to the upper part of the game board 81. A return ball prevention member 104 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 101, and a situation in which a game ball guided to the upper part of the game board 81 once reverses the guide rail constituted by the rails 101 and 102 is prevented. Is done. A return rubber 105 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 102 at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the game ball, and the game ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 105, and the game area is reduced while the momentum is attenuated. Is bounced back to the center.

  A special symbol display device 93 is provided in the upper right part of the game area. The special symbol display device 93 is displayed under the control of the main control device 162. The special symbol display device 93 mainly displays the change in the effect symbol and the result thereof, and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The special symbol display device 93 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 93a which are light emitting means and a 7-segment display 93b.

  The LED 93a indicates the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 by a lighting state, indicates whether or not the production symbol is fluctuating by a lighting state, and indicates whether the stop symbol is a jackpot symbol or an off symbol depending on the lighting state. Or the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state. The LEDs 93a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 can be notified with a small number of LEDs depending on the combination of the emission colors. .

  The 7-segment display 93b is for displaying the number of rounds in a big hit and an error display.

  A variable display unit 86 is provided at the center of the game area. The variable display unit 86 is provided with an effect symbol display device 91 composed of an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) and a normal symbol display device 94 composed of LEDs. The variable display unit 86 is provided with a center frame 92 so as to surround the outer periphery of the effect symbol display device 91.

  The effect symbol display device 91 variably displays the effect symbol in response to winning at the start winning opening 84. On the effect symbol display device 91, three symbol rows of left, middle and right are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Each symbol sequence is composed of a plurality of effect symbols, and these effect symbols are scrolled vertically for each symbol column, so that variable display is performed. The effect symbol display device 91 is configured by a variable display device such as a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) display, a 7-segment LED, a dot matrix display device, and a drum that variably displays by rotation of a motor, instead of the LCD. Also good.

When the game ball wins the start winning opening 84 while the production symbol is changing on the production symbol display device 91,
The number of winnings will be deferred up to 4 times. The number of balls on hold is displayed on the special symbol display device 93 and also lit on the hold lamp 96. Four hold lamps 96 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holds, and are provided symmetrically above the effect symbol display device 91.

  The normal symbol display device 94 variably displays the normal symbol when the through gate 85 passes. The normal symbol display device 94 includes a normal symbol display unit 94 a and a holding lamp 95. In the normal symbol display device 94, the display unit 94 a performs variable display by alternately lighting the “O” normal symbol and the “X” normal symbol. When the change display stops at a predetermined symbol (for example, a symbol “◯”), the movable pieces (electric tulips) provided on both sides of the start winning opening 84 are opened for a predetermined time, and the starting winning opening 84 is opened. It becomes easy to win.

  If the game ball passes through the through gate 85 while the normal symbol is changing on the normal symbol display device 94, the number of passes is suspended up to four times. The number of reserved balls is displayed on the special symbol display device 93 and also displayed on the hold lamp 95. Four hold lamps 95 are provided for the maximum number of holds, and are provided symmetrically below the effect symbol display device 91.

  Below the variable display unit 86, there is provided a start winning opening 84 through which a game ball can be won. When a game ball wins in the start winning opening 84, the start winning opening sensor 154 is turned on, and the main controller 162 makes a big hit lottery in response to this. Further, when a game ball wins at the start winning opening 84, five game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  A variable winning device 83 is provided below the start winning opening 84. A laterally long rectangular large winning opening 83a is provided at a substantially central portion of the variable winning device 83. As a result of the jackpot lottery, if the jackpot is won, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed, the LED 93a is turned on to indicate that it is a jackpot, and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the production symbol display device 91. Is reported. After that, a big hit occurs. When a big win is reached, the special winning opening 83a that is normally closed is opened until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, 30 seconds have elapsed or ten game balls have been won). When a game ball wins the big prize opening 83a, 15 game balls are paid out as a prize ball.

  The special prize opening 83a is closed when a predetermined condition is established, and after the closure, the special prize opening 83a is opened again until the predetermined condition is established. The opening / closing operation of the big prize opening 83a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. Therefore, during the big hit, a larger amount of prize balls are paid out to the player than usual.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 83 includes a horizontally-long rectangular opening and closing plate that covers the large winning opening 83a, and a solenoid for opening and closing the front side with the lower side of the opening and closing plate as an axis. Yes. The large winning opening 83a is normally closed so that a game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. On the other hand, at the time of a big hit, the solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, and an open state in which the game ball is likely to win the big winning opening 83a is temporarily formed. It operates so as to repeat the above state alternately.

  In addition, a plurality of general winning ports 82 through which game balls can be won are provided on the left and right sides of the start winning port 84. When game balls win the general winning opening 82, 5 to 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Further, an out port 87 is provided at the bottom of the game area. The game balls that have not won any of the winning ports 82 to 84 are led out to the discharge passage (not shown) through the out port 87.

  Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, and the like are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 81. It can be visually recognized through 14 small windows.

Next, the configuration of the control system of the pachinko machine 10 will be described.
FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the control system 300.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the control system 300 includes a main control device 162, a payout control device 242, an audio lamp control device 143, a display control device 302 that performs display control of the effect symbol display device 91, a power source and a launch. And a control device 243.

The main controller 162 includes an MPU (Micro Processing Unit) 310 that is a one-chip type microprocessor such as a DIP (Dual Inline Package), an input port 316 for inputting data from the outside of the main controller 162, and the main controller 162. And an output port 318 for outputting data to the outside. The MPU 310, the input port 316 and the output port 318 are connected to each other via the bus 320.

  The MPU 310 includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 312 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 310 and fixed value data, a RAM 314 that functions as a work area for storing various data when the control program is executed, It has various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit.

  The RAM 314 has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the MPU 310, a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 310, and a work area for storing values such as various flags, counters, and I / Os (work Region). The RAM 314 is configured to hold (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply and launch control device 243 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 314 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down (including when the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure; hereinafter the same), values such as I / O are stored in the RAM 314. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 314. Writing to the RAM 314 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (FIG. 27), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 314 is executed in the start-up process (FIG. 26) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 243c to the NMI terminal of the MPU 310 when the power is shut off. When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 310, the NMI allocation is performed as a power failure process. Is executed (FIG. 23).

  In the input port 316, winning port sensors 152 a to 152 c that detect game balls won in each general winning port 82, a count sensor 153 that detects game balls won in the variable winning device 83, and a starting winning port 84 are won. Connected to the start winning port sensor 154 for detecting the game ball, the gate sensor 155 for detecting the game ball passing through the through gate 85, the launch control unit 243b, the RAM erasing switch circuit 243d, the payout control device 242, and the like Has been.

The output port 318 includes a payout control device 242, an audio lamp control device 143, a special symbol display device 93, a normal symbol display device 94, an external terminal board 213, a launch control unit 243 b, and a variable winning device 83. Solenoid, etc. are connected. The MPU 310 transmits various commands for performing game effect control or game ball payout control to the sound lamp control device 143 and the payout control device 242 via the output port 318, respectively. The communication with the sound lamp control device 143 is one-way from the main control device 162 to the sound lamp control device 143. On the other hand, communication with the payout control device 242 is bidirectional.

  The payout control device 242 is connected to a main control device 162, a payout device 224, a ball lending connection terminal plate 249, and a ball non-detection sensor 223a. Further, the ball lending device Y is connected to the ball lending connection terminal plate 249.

  A main control device 162, a sound output device 362, a lamp display device 364, a display control device 302, and an operation button 35 are connected to the sound lamp control device 143. Furthermore, an effect symbol display device 91 is connected to the display control device 302.

  The power supply and launch control device 243 includes a power supply unit 243a that supplies power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a launch control unit 243b that controls the launch of the game ball, a power failure monitoring circuit 243c that monitors power shutdown due to a power failure, The RAM erase switch circuit 243d is connected to the RAM erase switch 247.

  The power supply unit 243a is connected to a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like via a transformer, for example. Then, based on the external power supplied from the transformer, a necessary operating voltage is supplied to each of the control devices 162, 242, 143, 302 and the like. As its outline, the power supply unit 243a takes in the AC 24 volt power supplied from the transformer, drives the various switches, solenoids, motors, etc., 12 volt voltage, logic 5 volt voltage, RAM A backup voltage or the like for backup is generated, and the necessary voltage is supplied to each of the control devices 162, 242, 143, 302 and the like with the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage.

  The game ball launcher 110 is connected to the launch controller 243b. When the main controller 162 instructs the launch control unit 243b to launch the game ball, the launch control unit 243b sets the game ball launch device 110 so that the game ball is launched with a launch intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation of the game ball launch handle 41. Control. Specifically, when a player touches the game ball launch handle 41 with a touch sensor (not shown) and a launch stop switch (not shown) for stopping launch is not operated, The solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the game ball launch handle 41, and the game ball is launched with a launch intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation of the game ball launch handle 41.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 243c is a circuit that outputs a power failure signal SG1 when the power is shut off. The power failure monitoring circuit 243c monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 243a, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown) occurs when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Power failure signal SG1 is output to control device 162 and payout control device 242. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 162 and the payout controller 242 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process (FIG. 23). The power supply unit 243a has a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system 300, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. It is configured to maintain the output at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 162 and payout controller 242 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 243d is a circuit that outputs a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 162 and the payout controller 242 when the RAM erase switch 247 is pressed. The main controller 162 and the payout controller 242 clear the respective backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power is turned on.

Next, the display screen of the effect symbol display device 91 will be described.
FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining a display screen of the effect symbol display device 91.

  FIG. 17A schematically shows the display screen area division setting and the effective line setting, and FIG. 17B shows an example of an actual display screen.

  The production symbols are composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers “0” to “9”. Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers “0” to “9” in front of a symbol made of a wooden box. Of these, the main symbols with odd numbers (“1”, “3”, “5”, “7”, “9”) have a large number added to almost the entire front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (“0”, “2”, “4”, “6”, “8”) are used to protect characters such as furoshiki, helmets, etc. A simulated accessory symbol is added, so that an even number is small in green on the lower right side of the accessory symbol and is displayed on the front side of the accessory symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 17A, the display screen of the effect symbol display device 91 is roughly divided into two vertically. The lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm for displaying the effect symbols in a variable manner, and the other upper third is the auxiliary display area Ds for displaying the notice effect and the character.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right. Three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, effect symbols “0” to “9” are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and each symbol column Z1 to Z3 is scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity to perform a variable display. In the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so that they appear in descending order. The middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, a maximum of three effect symbols can be displayed for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle portion of the main display area Dm is the effective line L1, and the effect symbols are stopped and displayed on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2 in each variable display. A jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot if the jackpot symbols are arranged on the active line L1 when the effect symbol is stopped.

  The sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm. Furthermore, it is equally divided into three notice areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Here, the left and right notice areas Ds1, Ds3 are usually covered with a double-open opaque door that is electrically opened and closed by a solenoid, and sometimes the solenoid is excited and the door is opened to the front side. The display area is visible to the player. The center notice area Ds2 is a display area that is always visible without being covered by the door.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 17B, a total of nine effect symbols are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, the left and right doors are closed, and the left and right notice areas Ds1 and Ds3 are covered and the display screen cannot be visually recognized. If one or both of the left and right doors are opened during the variable display, a video is displayed in the left and right notice areas Ds1 and Ds3, and the player is informed that it is easier to make a big hit than usual. Is done. In the center notice area Ds2, a predetermined character (in this embodiment, a boy wearing a bee) usually performs a predetermined action, sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, A notice effect will be performed. The display screen of the effect symbol display device 91 is divided into upper and lower display areas Dm and Ds in principle. However, the effect symbols and characters are displayed larger across the display areas Dm and Ds. It can also be done.

Next, the type of game state (hereinafter referred to as game type) will be described.
FIG. 18 is a diagram showing the jackpot type.

  In the pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 18, five types of non-probable big hit, probable big hit, JUB big hit, sudden big hit and latent big hit are defined as the big hit types among the game types. In addition, a small hit is also defined as a hit type.

  If the jackpot lottery results in a non-probable big hit, the special symbol display device 93 turns on the LED 93a to indicate that it is a non-probable big jackpot, and the effect symbol display device 91 displays a non-probable variation in the jackpot symbol. Control the display so that a non-probable jackpot occurs after that. The non-probable symbol is, for example, a combination in which the main symbol is an even number of slots such as “222”, “444”, and “666” in the effect symbol display device 91. In addition, a round (hereinafter referred to as a long open round) in which the grand prize winning opening 83a is opened for a long time (for example, 29 [s]) in one round continues for a maximum of 15 times. When nine game balls are won in the big prize opening 83a while the big prize opening 83a is open, one round is completed even before the opening time elapses. After the jackpot presentation is over, the winning probability of the jackpot lottery is controlled to be in a normal state lower than the probability variation state, and the short time state in which the variation time of the production symbol is shorter than the normal state is a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). Control to continue.

  In the short time state, the opening time of the electric tulip at the start winning opening 84 is longer than in the normal state (for example, in the normal state, 0.2 [s] is opened, but in the short time state, the opening time is 2 [s]. Or the number of times the electric tulip is opened is greater than in the normal state (for example, one opening is performed in the normal state, and three opening is performed in the short-time state). In the short-time state, the winning probability that the electric tulip opens is higher than that in the normal state, or the variation time of the normal symbol is shorter than that in the normal state. Note that a combination thereof may be used. For example, the winning probability of opening the electric tulip may be higher than in the normal state, and the opening time of the electric tulip in the start winning opening 84 may be longer than in the normal state. As described above, in the short-time state, the winning opportunities to the start winning opening 84 are increased, so that the digestion of the game ball can be suppressed.

  As a result of the jackpot lottery, when the probability variation jackpot is reached, the special symbol display device 93 turns on the LED 93a so as to indicate that the probability variation jackpot is achieved, and the effect symbol display symbol on the effect symbol display device 91 is stopped and displayed. Then, control is performed so that a probability variation jackpot is generated. For example, in the effect symbol display device 91, the probability variation symbol is a combination in which the main symbol is composed of odd numbers such as “111”, “333”, and “555”. In addition, the long open round continues up to 15 times. When nine game balls are won in the big prize opening 83a while the big prize opening 83a is open, one round is completed even before the opening time elapses. After the jackpot presentation is finished, control is performed so that the probability variation state is established, and control is performed so that the short-time state continues until the next jackpot.

  When the non-probable jackpot or the probable jackpot is reached, a jackpot signal with a short time is output from the external terminal board 213 from the start of the jackpot effect to the end of the jackpot effect. The jackpot signal with time reduction is output from one of the output terminals of the external terminal board 213. Therefore, since the number of jackpots is displayed with “1” added in the call lamp device 500, the player can grasp that the jackpot has occurred by looking at the display of the call lamp device 500.

As a result of the jackpot lottery, if the JUB jackpot is reached, the special symbol display device 93 turns on the LED 93a to indicate that it is a JUB jackpot, and the effect symbol display device 91 stops and displays the winning symbol symbols. Then, control is performed so that a JUB jackpot is generated. The stochastic symbol is, for example, a combination that is difficult to distinguish from an off symbol such as “341”. When a predetermined time (for example, 25 [s]) has elapsed after the start of the jackpot effect, the effect symbol display device 91 displays that the jackpot has occurred. In addition, a round (hereinafter, referred to as a short opening round) in which the big winning opening 83a is opened for a short time (for example, 60 [ms]) is continued 15 times in one round, and then a long opening round is continued up to 14 times. When nine game balls are won in the big prize opening 83a while the big prize opening 83a is open, one round is completed even before the opening time elapses. After the jackpot presentation is finished, control is performed so that the probability variation state is established, and control is performed so that the short-time state continues until the next jackpot.

  In the case of JUB jackpot, the jackpot signal with a short time is not output from the external terminal board 213 until the occurrence of jackpot is displayed from the start of the jackpot presentation (for example, 25 [s]), and then the jackpot presentation A jackpot signal with a short time is output from the external terminal board 213 until the end. Therefore, in the calling lamp device 500, the number of jackpots does not change until the occurrence of the jackpot is displayed, so that the player can grasp that the JUB jackpot has occurred even when viewing the display of the calling lamp device 500. Can not. As a result, the player can expect that a JUB jackpot will occur until a predetermined time has elapsed even if the confident symbol is stopped and displayed, thereby reducing the possibility that the game taste will decrease. it can. In addition, although it cannot be grasped that it is JUB big hit by the lighting mode of LED93a, since the lighting mode of LED93a is complicated and various, it is difficult to grasp at a glance.

  As a result of the jackpot lottery, if the winning jackpot is won, the special symbol display device 93 turns on the LED 93a to indicate that it is a winning jackpot, and the effect symbol display device 91 stops and displays the winning jackpot symbol. Then, control is performed so that a sudden big hit occurs. When a predetermined time (for example, 25 [s]) has elapsed after the start of the jackpot effect, the effect symbol display device 91 displays that the probability change state is reached. In addition, 15 short open rounds continue. When nine game balls are won in the big prize opening 83a while the big prize opening 83a is open, one round is completed even before the opening time elapses. After the jackpot presentation is finished, control is performed so that the probability variation state is established, and control is performed so that the short-time state continues until the next jackpot.

  When the winning hit is a big hit, the short hit jackpot signal is not output from the external terminal board 213 until the transition from the start of the big hit effect to the probability change state is displayed (for example, 25 [s]), and then the big hit A jackpot signal with a time reduction is output from the external terminal board 213 until the end of the production. Therefore, in the calling lamp device 500, the number of jackpots does not change until the transition to the probability change state is displayed, so that the player understands that the sudden jackpot has occurred even when viewing the display of the calling lamp device 500. I can't. As a result, the player can expect the occurrence of a sudden big hit until a predetermined time has elapsed even if the suspicion symbol is stopped and displayed, so that the possibility of a decrease in the game taste may be reduced. it can. In addition, although it is not possible to grasp | ascertain that it is a big hit by the lighting mode of LED93a, since the lighting mode of LED93a is complicated and various, it is difficult to grasp at a glance.

As a result of the jackpot lottery, if the potential big hit is won, the special symbol display device 93 turns on the LED 93a so as to indicate that the potential big hit is won, and the effect symbol display device 91 stops the big hit symbol among the jackpot symbols. The display is then controlled so that a potential big hit occurs. In addition, 15 short open rounds continue. When nine game balls are won in the big prize opening 83a while the big prize opening 83a is open, one round is completed even before the opening time elapses. After the jackpot effect is finished, control is performed so that the probability variation state is achieved, and control is performed so that the time-saving state continues until the next jackpot only when the time-saving state is established. In the potential big hit, the opening time of the big prize opening 83a in one round is extremely short, and the period (opening time) of one round is short. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an unexpectedness as if the player suddenly shifted to a probable state without making a big hit. Furthermore, it becomes easy for amusement stores to make a balance between the winning probability of the jackpot lottery and the operation.

  When the potential big hit is won, the time-saving big hit signal is not output from the external terminal board 213. However, in the time-saving state, a jackpot signal with a time-shortening is output from the external terminal board 213 from the start of the jackpot presentation to the end of the jackpot presentation. Therefore, in the calling lamp device 500, the number of jackpots does not change except in the case of a short-time state, so that the player understands that a latent jackpot has occurred even when viewing the display of the calling lamp device 500. I can't. Accordingly, the player can expect the occurrence of a latent big hit when the suspicion symbol is stopped and displayed, so that the possibility that the game taste is lowered can be reduced. In addition, although it is not possible to grasp | ascertain that it is a potential big hit by the lighting mode of LED93a, since the lighting mode of LED93a is complicated and various, it is difficult to grasp at a glance.

  As a result of the big hit lottery, the special symbol display device 93 turns on the LED 93a so as to indicate that it is a big win, and the effect symbol display device 91 stops and displays the sudden winning symbols. Then, control is performed so that a small hit occurs. Further, the operation of opening the special winning opening 83a for a short time (for example, 60 [ms]) continues 15 times. When nine game balls are won in the big prize opening 83a while the big prize opening 83a is open, the small hit effect ends. After the small hit effect is finished, control is performed so as to maintain the original state. For example, the probability variation state and the time reduction state are maintained in the probability variation state and the time reduction state, and the normal state and non-time reduction state are maintained in the normal state and the non-time reduction state.

  In the case of a small hit, the short hit jackpot signal is not output from the external terminal board 213. Therefore, since the number of jackpots does not change in the call lamp device 500, even if the player sees the display of the call lamp device 500, the player cannot grasp that the jackpot has occurred. As a result, the player cannot be distinguished from the potential big hit when the suspicion symbol is stopped and displayed, and can expect the occurrence of the potential big hit, thus reducing the game preference. The possibility can be reduced. In addition, although it is not possible to grasp that it is a small hit by the lighting mode of the LED 93a, since the lighting mode of the LED 93a is complicated and diverse, it is difficult to grasp at a glance.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, two types of out-of-reach and out-of-reach are defined as out-of-game types among the game types.

  As a result of the jackpot lottery, if the reach is out of reach, the special symbol display device 93 turns on the LED 93a to indicate that it is out of reach. At the same time, the left symbol and the right symbol among the three symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol, and the player is expected to win the jackpot. Further, the middle symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol different from the right symbol, so that the out-of-reach symbol is stopped and displayed on the effect symbol display device 91, and thereafter, control is performed so that the symbol is removed.

  As a result of the jackpot lottery, if the non-reach is lost, the special symbol display device 93 turns on the LED 93a so as to indicate that it is a non-reach and the non-reach off symbol is displayed on the effect symbol display device 91 without performing the reach effect. Is displayed in a stopped state, and then controlled so as to be released.

Next, a random number counter used in the main controller 162 will be described.
FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a counter buffer and a reserved ball storage area of the RAM 314.

  The MPU 310 performs jackpot lottery, display setting of the special symbol display device 93, and the like using various random number counters. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19, a jackpot random number counter C1 for performing a jackpot lottery, a jackpot type random number counter C2 for determining a jackpot type, and whether to perform reach production or not. The reach random number counter C3 and the variation pattern random number counter CS for determining the variation pattern of the effect design are used. Also, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 for setting an initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, a normal lottery random number counter C4 for performing a normal lottery for displaying a lottery result on the normal symbol display device 94, and a normal lottery random number A second initial value random number counter CINI2 for setting an initial value of the counter C4 is used.

  The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that can take any value within a numerical range of “0” to “738”. At each update, “1” is added to the current value, and when the maximum value (“738”) is exceeded, the initial value is restored. In the case of the jackpot random number counter C1, the initial value is set to the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 when the maximum value is reached. The value of a random number that is a big hit (hereinafter referred to as a big hit value) is set in each of the normal state and the probability variation state. In the normal state, for example, the number of jackpot values is two, and the values are “373” and “727”. On the other hand, for the probability variation state, for example, the number of jackpot values is 14, and the values are “59”, “109”, “163”, “211”, “263”, “317”, “367”. ”,“ 421 ”,“ 479 ”,“ 523 ”,“ 631 ”,“ 683 ”,“ 733 ”. Also, the random number value (hereinafter referred to as “small hit value”) that is a small hit is “157”, for example.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that can take any value within the same numerical range (“0” to “738”) as the big hit random number counter C1. At each update, “1” is added to the current value, and when the maximum value (“738”) is exceeded, the initial value is restored. In the case of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the initial value is set to “0”. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated at a different period from the big hit random number counter C1. As a result, the jackpot random number counter C1 can be irregularly updated, so that the possibility of fraud can be reduced.

  The jackpot type random number counter C2 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that can take any value within a numerical range of “0” to “99”. At each update, “1” is added to the current value, and when the maximum value (“99”) is exceeded, the initial value is restored. In the case of the jackpot type random number counter C2, the initial value is set to “0”. For example, random number values that become non-probable variation jackpots (hereinafter referred to as non-probability variation jackpot type values) are “0” to “34”, for example. For example, random number values that are probable jackpots (hereinafter referred to as probable jackpot type values) are “35” to “74”, for example. The random number value (hereinafter referred to as the JUB jackpot type value) that becomes a JUB jackpot is, for example, “75” to “79”. The random number value (hereinafter, referred to as the “accuracy big hit type value”) that becomes the big hit is “80” to “89”, for example. For example, the value of a random number that is a potential big hit (hereinafter referred to as a latent big hit type value) is “90” to “99”, for example. Thus, since there are five types of jackpots, the stage symbols that are stopped and displayed on the stage symbol display device 91 are modes corresponding to five types of jackpots, modes corresponding to small jackpots, and 1 corresponding to a loss. Any one of a total of seven types of modes with the types of modes is selected.

The reach random number counter C3 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that can take any value within a numerical range of “0” to “1998”. At each update, “1” is added to the current value, and when the maximum value (“1998”) is exceeded, the initial value is restored. In the case of the reach random number counter C3, the initial value is set to “0”. Random values (hereinafter referred to as reach values) for performing a reach effect when deviating are, for example, “1887” to “1998”.

  The variation pattern random number counter CS is configured as, for example, a loop counter that can take any value within a numerical range of “0” to “210”. At each update, “1” is added to the current value, and when the maximum value (“210”) is exceeded, the initial value is restored. In the case of the fluctuation pattern random number counter CS, the initial value is set to “0”.

  The normal lottery random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that can take any value within a numerical range of “0” to “250”, for example. At each update, “1” is added to the current value, and when the maximum value (“250”) is exceeded, the initial value is restored. In the case of the normal lottery random number counter C4, the initial value is set to the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 when the maximum value is reached. The number of random number values to be won is, for example, 149, and the values are “5” to “153”.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that can take any value within the same numerical range (“0” to “250”) as the normal lottery random number counter C4. At each update, “1” is added to the current value, and when the maximum value (“250”) is exceeded, the initial value is restored. In the case of the second initial value random number counter CINI2, the initial value is set to “0”. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated at a different period from the normal lottery random number counter C4. As a result, the regular lottery random number counter C4 can be updated irregularly, so that the possibility of fraud can be reduced.

  The RAM 314 is provided with a counter buffer. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is stored in the counter buffer.

  The RAM 314 has a reserved ball storage area. The reserved ball storage area is composed of one execution area and four reserved areas. One hold area stores the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation pattern random number counter CS at the timing when the game ball wins the start winning slot 84. Specifically, if no random number counter value is stored in any of the reserved areas, it is stored in the first reserved area. When a random number counter value is stored in the first reserved area, it is stored in the second reserved area. If random number counter values are stored in the first and second reserved areas, they are stored in the third reserved area. If random number counter values are stored in the first to third reserved areas, they are stored in the fourth reserved area. If random number counter values are stored in all reserved areas, they are not stored in any reserved area.

  The random number counter value in the holding area is shifted to the execution area side every time a big hit lottery is performed. Specifically, the random number counter value in the first reserved area is shifted to the execution area, and then the random number counter value in the second reserved area is shifted to the first reserved area. Next, the random number counter value in the third reserved area is shifted to the second reserved area, and then the random number counter value in the fourth reserved area is shifted to the third reserved area.

Next, the type of command will be described.
FIG. 20 is a diagram showing command types.
As shown in FIG. 20, the command types include a variation pattern command, a stop type command, a confirmation command, an opening command, an ending command, a round start command, and a round end command.

The variation pattern command includes a command for designating any one of a plurality of variation patterns. The variation pattern corresponds to the game type. For example, the variation pattern 3 corresponds to a gaming state that is lost after performing a normal reach which is a normal reach production, and the variation pattern 8 is a non-probability variation hit after performing a super reach which is a flashy reach production than the normal reach. It corresponds to the gaming state that becomes. Also, the variation pattern 10 corresponds to a gaming state that is a promising big hit after performing a special reach, which is a flashy reach production than a super reach, and the variation pattern 12 is a game that becomes a big jackpot after performing a special variation display. It corresponds to the state. The variation pattern command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 143 at the start of variation of the effect symbol together with the stop type command.

  The stop type command is used to specify an off symbol as a stop symbol for a production symbol, a command for specifying a non-probable variation symbol as a stop symbol for a production symbol, and a probability variation symbol as a stop symbol for a production symbol. Command and a command for designating a stochastic symbol as a stop symbol of the effect symbol. These do not specify the specific contents of the stop symbol, but merely specify the type of the stop symbol. That is, only the stop symbol type is determined by the main controller 162 and the specific contents of the stop symbol are determined by the display controller 302, so that the processing load on the main controller 162 can be reduced. The stop type command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 143 immediately after the transmission of the variation pattern command.

  The confirmation command is a command for designating confirmation of the stop display of the effect symbol. The confirmation command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 143 at the end of the variation of the effect symbol.

  The opening command corresponds to a non-probable jackpot, a probable jackpot, a JUB jackpot, a sudden jackpot, a latent jackpot or a jackpot, and is a command for designating the start of a jackpot effect or a jackpot effect. Therefore, the display control device 302 can specify the non-probable big hit, the probability big hit, the JUB big hit, the sudden big hit, the latent big hit or the small hit from the opening command. The opening command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 143 at the start of the big hit effect or at the start of the small hit effect.

  The ending command corresponds to a non-probable jackpot, a probable jackpot, a JUB jackpot, a sudden jackpot, a latent jackpot or a jackpot, and is a command for designating the end of the jackpot effect or the jackpot effect. Therefore, the display control device 302 can specify the non-probable big jackpot, the probable big jackpot, the JUB big jackpot, the sudden big jackpot, the latent big jackpot or the small jackpot from the ending command. The opening command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 143 at the end of the big hit effect or at the end of the small hit effect.

  The round start command is a command for designating the start of a round in the jackpot effect. The round start command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 143 at the start of the round.

  The round end command is a command for designating the end of the round in the jackpot effect. The round end command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 143 at the end of the round.

  As other command types, there are a payout initialization command, a payout return command, a prize ball command, a power-off command, and other various commands. The commands in FIG. 20 are merely representative commands.

Next, the data structure of the ROM 312 will be described.
The ROM 312 stores a plurality of variation pattern tables for determining a variation pattern and a distribution structure table for determining the variation pattern table.

First, the data structure of the distribution structure table will be described.
FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating a part of the data structure of the distribution structure table 404.

The variation pattern table is provided corresponding to each of the jackpot and miss.
A plurality of variation pattern tables corresponding to jackpots are provided for each jackpot type.

  A plurality of variation pattern tables corresponding to non-probable variation jackpots (hereinafter referred to as non-probability variation jackpot variation pattern tables) are provided for each number of reserved balls. A non-probable variation jackpot variation pattern table corresponding to each number of reserved balls is further provided for each predetermined numerical range of the reach random number counter C3. The non-probable variation jackpot variation pattern table shares a part of the variation pattern table corresponding to the probability variation jackpot (hereinafter referred to as the probability variation jackpot variation pattern table). Therefore, there is no dedicated variation pattern table corresponding only to the uncertain variation big hit. As a result, it is not possible to distinguish between a non-probable big hit and a probable big jackpot from the variation pattern, so that it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game will be reduced even in the case of a non-probable big hit. The non-probable large hit variation pattern table is referred to after the number of reserved balls is subtracted (described later: S606, S704), so the range of the number of reserved balls is “0” to “3”. Yes. In FIG. 21, the range of the number of reserved balls from “0” to “3” is shown for convenience, but actually, a non-probable large hit variation pattern table is provided for each number of held balls. The same applies to the other variation pattern tables.

  The variation pattern command determined by the non-probable variation jackpot variation pattern table does not match the variation pattern command determined by the variation pattern table corresponding to the game type other than the probability variation jackpot. Therefore, the display control device 302 can specify the non-probable variation jackpot or the probability variation jackpot from the variation pattern command.

  A plurality of probability variation jackpot variation pattern tables are provided for each number of reserved balls. A probability variation jackpot variation pattern table corresponding to each number of reserved balls is further provided for each predetermined numerical range of the reach random number counter C3. Of the probability variation jackpot variation pattern table, the variation pattern command determined by the dedicated variation pattern table corresponding only to the probability variation jackpot does not match the variation pattern command determined by the variation pattern table corresponding to another game type. Therefore, the display control device 302 can identify the probable big hit from the variation pattern command.

  A plurality of variation pattern tables corresponding to JUB jackpots (hereinafter referred to as JUB jackpot variation pattern tables) are provided for each number of reserved balls. A JUB jackpot variation pattern table corresponding to each number of reserved balls is further provided for each predetermined numerical range of the reach random number counter C3. The variation pattern command determined by the JUB jackpot variation pattern table does not match the variation pattern command determined by the variation pattern table corresponding to another game type. Therefore, the display control device 302 can specify the JUB jackpot from the variation pattern command.

  A plurality of variation pattern tables (hereinafter referred to as “accuracy large hit variation pattern tables”) corresponding to the likelihood big hits are provided for each number of reserved balls. A random hit variation pattern table corresponding to each number of held balls is further provided for each predetermined numerical range of the reach random number counter C3. The variation pattern command determined by the random hit variation pattern table does not match the variation pattern command determined by the variation pattern table corresponding to another game type. Therefore, the display control device 302 can identify the sudden hit from the variation pattern command.

  A plurality of variation pattern tables (hereinafter referred to as “latency probability variation pattern table”) corresponding to the latent probability hit are provided for each number of reserved balls. A latent probability hit variation pattern table corresponding to each number of reserved balls is further provided for each predetermined numerical range of the reach random number counter C3. The variation pattern command determined by the probability hit variation pattern table does not match the variation pattern command determined by the variation pattern table corresponding to another game type. Therefore, the display control device 302 can specify the latent probability big hit from the variation pattern command.

  A plurality of variation pattern tables corresponding to small hits (hereinafter referred to as small hit variation pattern tables) are provided for each number of reserved balls. The small hit variation pattern table corresponding to each number of reserved balls is further provided for each predetermined numerical range of the reach random number counter C3. The variation pattern command determined by the small hit variation pattern table does not match the variation pattern command determined by the variation pattern table corresponding to another game type. Therefore, the display control device 302 can identify the small hit from the variation pattern command.

  On the other hand, a plurality of variation pattern tables corresponding to detachment (hereinafter referred to as detachment variation pattern tables) are provided for each number of reserved balls. A deviation variation pattern table corresponding to each number of reserved balls is further provided for each predetermined numerical range of the reach random number counter C3. Here, the variation pattern table corresponding to the reach failure and the variation pattern table corresponding to the non-reach failure are provided separately. For example, in the example of FIG. 21, the deviation variation pattern table corresponding to the reach random number counter C3 of “0” to “1886” corresponds to the variation pattern table corresponding to the non-reach deviation, and the other variation variation pattern tables. However, it corresponds to the variation pattern table corresponding to the loss of reach. In the example of FIG. 21, only the range of the number of reserved balls “0” to “1” is illustrated, but the range of “2” to “3” is also set for each predetermined numerical range of the reach random number counter C3. A deviation pattern table is provided.

  The variation pattern command determined by the deviation variation pattern table does not match the variation pattern command determined by the variation pattern table corresponding to another game type. Therefore, the display control device 302 can identify either out of reach or out of reach from the variation pattern command.

  In the distribution structure table 404, as shown in FIG. 21, addresses to the variation pattern table are registered for each of the values of big hit / small hit / off, game type, number of reserved balls, and reach random number counter. . In the example of FIG. 21, the result of the jackpot lottery is “big jackpot”, the jackpot type is “non-probable variation jackpot”, the number of reserved balls is “0” to “3”, and the value of the reach random number counter is “0” to “998”. In some cases, an address to the variation pattern table 1 is associated.

Next, the data structure of the variation pattern table will be described.
FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating a data structure of the variation pattern table 406.

For example, 211 records are registered in the variation pattern table 406 in correspondence with the numerical range of the variation pattern random number counter CS as shown in FIG. Each record includes a field for registering a variation pattern number indicating a variation pattern. The value of the variation pattern random number counter CS is acquired, the variation pattern number is read from the record of the rank of the acquired random number counter value, and the variation pattern specified by the read variation pattern number is determined. For example, when the random number counter value is “30”, the variation pattern number is read from the 30th record. In the example of FIG. 22, “18” is read from the fluctuation pattern table 406, so that the fluctuation pattern 18 is determined.

Next, processing executed by the main controller 162 will be described.
The MPU 310 activates a control program stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 312 and executes main control processing. The main control process is broadly divided into an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal, a timer interrupt process activated periodically, and a startup process activated upon power-on. The main process is executed after the start-up process.

First, the NMI interrupt process will be described.
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by main controller 162.

  The NMI interrupt process is a process that is started by interrupting the current control when the power failure signal SG1 is input from the NMI terminal. When the NMI interrupt process is executed in the MPU 310, as shown in FIG. Migrate to

  In step S100, the power failure flag indicating that the power interruption has occurred is turned on, the series of processes are terminated, and the original process is restored.

Next, the timer interrupt process will be described.
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by main controller 162.

  The timer interrupt process is a process executed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 [ms]), and when executed in the MPU 310, the process proceeds to step S200 as shown in FIG.

  In step S200, the state of various sensors such as the ball detection sensors 152 to 155 except for the RAM erasing switch 247 and the various switches are read, the state of the switches is determined, and the detection information indicating the detection result of the switches is stored in the RAM 314. Execute the switch reading process.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S202, and the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated. Specifically, “1” is added to each value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the maximum value is exceeded, each value is set to “0”. The updated values are stored in the counter buffer.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S204, where the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the ordinary lottery random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, “1” is added to each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal lottery random number counter C4, and when the maximum value is exceeded, the initial value is set. To do. The updated values are stored in the counter buffer.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S206, where a start winning process for determining a winning to the start winning opening 84 is executed, a series of processes are terminated, and the original process is restored.

Next, the start winning process in step S206 will be described.
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the start winning process executed by the main controller 162.

  The start winning process is a process for determining a winning to the start winning opening 84, and when executed in step S206, the process proceeds to step S300 as shown in FIG.

In step S300, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the start winning opening 84 based on the detection information in the RAM 314. If it is determined that a game ball has won the start winning opening 84 (YES),
The process proceeds to step S302.

In step S302, it is determined whether or not the value N of the held ball counter is less than “4”. If it is determined that N is less than “4” (YES), the process proceeds to step S304, and the hold is held. “1” is added to the value N of the ball counter, and the process proceeds to step S306.

  In step S306, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type random number counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation pattern random number counter CS are stored in the reserved ball storage area. Specifically, if no random number counter value is stored in any reserved area, the random number counter value is stored in the first reserved area. When the random number counter value is stored in the first reserved area, the random number counter value is stored in the second reserved area. If random number counter values are stored in the first and second reserved areas, the random number counter values are stored in the third reserved area. If random number counter values are stored in the first to third reserved areas, the random number counter values are stored in the fourth reserved area.

When the process of step S306 ends, the series of processes ends and the original process is restored.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S302 that the value N of the held ball counter is “4” or more (NO), and if it is determined in step S300 that no game ball has been won in the start winning opening 84 ( In each case of NO), a series of processing is terminated and the original processing is restored.

Next, the startup process will be described.
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing start-up processing executed by main controller 162.

  The start-up process is a process started when the power is turned on, and when executed in the MPU 310, the process proceeds to step S400 as shown in FIG.

  In step S400, an initial setting associated with power-on is performed. In the initial setting, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer.

Next, the process proceeds to step S402, where a predetermined time (for example, 1 [s]) has elapsed to wait until the payout control device 242, the sound lamp control device 143, and the display control device 302 become operable. If it is determined that the predetermined time has passed (YES)
The process proceeds to step S404.

  In step S404, access to the RAM 314 is permitted, the process proceeds to step S406, and it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 247 is turned off. If it is determined that the RAM erase switch 247 is turned off ( YES), the process proceeds to step S408.

In step S408, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is turned on. If it is determined that the power failure flag is turned on (YES), it is determined that a power interruption has occurred, and step S4 is performed.
The process proceeds to 10 to calculate a RAM determination value. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value or hash value of data in the stack area and the work area of the RAM 314.

Next, the process proceeds to step S412 to determine the validity of the backup by determining whether or not the calculated RAM determination value is normal, and the RAM determination value is normal (that is, the calculated RAM determination value is If it is determined that it matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off (YES), the process proceeds to step S414. Here, instead of the RAM determination value, the RAM 31
The validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area 4 is correctly stored.

  In step S414, the power failure flag is turned off, the process proceeds to step S416, and a payout return command for designating that the payout control device 242 is returned to the power-off state is transmitted to the payout control device 242, and step S418 is performed. , Set interrupt permission, and move to main processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S412 that the RAM determination value is not normal (that is, the calculated RAM determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is shut off) (NO), the backed up RAM 314 data is destroyed. Therefore, the process proceeds to step S420.

  In step S420, the use area of the RAM 314 is cleared to “0”, the process proceeds to step S422, the RAM 314 is initialized, the process proceeds to step S424, and the payout for designating the initialization of the payout control device 242 is performed. The initialization command is transmitted to the payout control device 242, and the process proceeds to step S418.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S408 that the power failure flag has not been turned on (NO), it is determined that the power is not shut off, and the process proceeds to step S420.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S406 that the RAM erase switch 247 is not turned off (NO), the process proceeds to step S420.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S402 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (NO), the process waits in step S402 until the predetermined time has elapsed.

Next, the main process will be described.
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main controller 162.

  The main process is a process for performing main control of the main controller 162. As its outline, the processing of steps S500 to S520 is executed in a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 [ms]), and the remaining time of the time required for the processing of steps S500 to S516 in one period of the predetermined cycle is used. Steps S518 and S520 are repeatedly executed. When the main process is executed in the MPU 310, the process proceeds to step S500 as shown in FIG.

  In step S500, external output processing for transmitting the command set in the command buffer of the RAM 314 to the external terminal board 213, the payout control device 242, the power source and firing control device 243, or the sound lamp control device 143 is executed. Specifically, it is determined based on the detection information of the RAM 314 whether or not the start winning slot 84 or the like has been won, and if it is determined that there is a win, a payout command for designating the payout of the prize ball is given out. Send to. When a game ball is to be launched, a launch command for designating the launch of the game ball is transmitted to the power supply and launch control device 243. In addition, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, a confirmation command, an opening command, an ending command, a round start command, a round end command, and the like are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 143.

Next, the process proceeds to step S502, and the fluctuation pattern random number counter CS is updated. Specifically, “1” is added to the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter CS, and “0” is set when the maximum value is exceeded. Then, the update value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter CS is stored in the counter buffer.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S504, and the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 242 are read, and the process proceeds to step S506, where the effect symbol display device 91 displays the variation of the effect symbol. And the process proceeds to step S508.

  In step S508, a big prize opening / closing process for opening or closing the big prize opening 83a is executed when a big hit has occurred. In the big prize opening / closing process, when the round is started in the jackpot, the big prize opening 83a is opened and a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, 29 seconds have passed or nine game balls have won). If it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the special winning opening 83a is closed. This opening and closing is repeated up to the maximum number of rounds.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S510, and the normal symbol control process for variably displaying the normal symbols on the normal symbol display device 94 is executed. In the normal symbol control process, when the game ball passes through the through gate 85, the value of the normal lottery random number counter C4 is acquired at the passage timing, and the normal symbol variation display is started on the display unit 94a. Then, a normal lottery is performed based on the acquired random number counter value, and when it is a win, a game ball is placed in the start winning opening 84 by releasing an electric accessory that makes it difficult to win the starting winning opening 84 in normal times. Form an easy-to-win state. The electric accessory is opened for a predetermined time.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S512, and a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball is executed. In the launch control process, based on the detection information in the RAM 314, it is determined whether or not the player is touching the game ball launch handle 41 and whether or not a launch stop switch (not shown) is turned off. When it is determined that the handle 41 is touched and the firing stop switch is turned off, the firing command is set in the command buffer of the RAM 314. As a result, in the external output process in step S500, a firing command is transmitted to the power supply and launch control device 243 via the output port 318.

Next, the process proceeds to step S514, where it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is turned off. If it is determined that the power failure flag is turned off (YES), it is determined that the power shutoff has not occurred. When the process proceeds to step S516, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 4 [ms]) has elapsed since the start of the main process. If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (YES) ) Proceeds to step S518.

  In step S518, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated. Specifically, “1” is added to each value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the maximum value is exceeded, each value is set to “0”. The updated values are stored in the counter buffer.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S520, and the fluctuation pattern random number counter CS is updated. Specifically, “1” is added to the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter CS, and “0” is set when the maximum value is exceeded. Then, the update value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter CS is stored in the counter buffer.

When the process of step S520 ends, the process proceeds to step S514. Since the time required for the processing in steps S500 to S512 varies depending on the gaming state, the number of executions of the random number update processing in steps S518 and S520 also varies depending on the gaming state. Therefore, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation pattern random number counter CS can be irregularly updated, so that the possibility of fraudulent acts can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when it determines with predetermined time having passed by step S516 (NO), it transfers to step S500.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S514 that the power failure flag has not been turned off (NO), it is determined that the power cut has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S522 in order to execute the power cut process. The process of step S514 is executed at the end of the processes of steps S500 to S512 or at the end of the processes of steps S518 and S520. Therefore, since the power-off process is performed at the timing when each process is completed in the main process, it is not necessary to save the contents of the register of the MPU 310 in the stack area or store the value of the stack pointer in the power-off process. By setting a predetermined value for the stack pointer in the process of step S400, the process of step S500 can be started after the start-up process is completed. Therefore, the processing load on the main control device 162 can be reduced, and relatively stable control can be performed without causing the main control device 162 to malfunction or run away. In addition, since the power-off process is performed at the timing when each process is completed in the main process, the amount of information to be backed up in the RAM 314 can be reduced.

  In step S522, interrupt prohibition is set, the process proceeds to step S524, a power-off command for designating power-off is transmitted to the payout control device 242 and the sound lamp control device 143, and the process proceeds to step S526.

  In step S526, a RAM determination value is calculated, and the calculated RAM determination value is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 314. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value or hash value of data in the stack area and the work area of the RAM 314.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S528, the access to the RAM 314 is prohibited, and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off.

Next, the symbol control process in step S506 will be described.
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a symbol control process executed by main controller 162.

  The symbol control process is a process of displaying the variation of the effect symbol on the effect symbol display device 91. When the symbol control process is executed in step S506, the process proceeds to step S600 as shown in FIG.

In step S600, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is currently being hit. If it is determined that the jackpot is not being hit (YES), the process proceeds to step S602. As the jackpot, it includes during the jackpot effect being performed by the effect symbol display device 91 and a predetermined time after the jackpot effect is ended.

Next, the process proceeds to step S602, where it is determined whether or not the special symbol display device 93 is currently performing a variable display. If it is determined that the variable display is not being displayed (YES), the process proceeds to step S604 and the reserved ball It is determined whether or not the value N of the number counter is greater than “0”. If it is determined that the value N is greater than “0” (YES), the process proceeds to step S606.

In step S606, "1" is subtracted from the value N of the reserved ball number counter, the process proceeds to step S608, and the random number counter value in the reserved ball storage area is shifted to the execution area side. Specifically, the random number counter value in the first reserved area is shifted to the execution area, and then the random number counter value in the second reserved area is shifted to the first reserved area. Next, the random number counter value in the third reserved area is shifted to the second reserved area, and then the random number counter value in the fourth reserved area is shifted to the third reserved area.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S610, where the special symbol display device 93 executes a fluctuation start process for starting the fluctuation display, ends a series of processes, and returns to the original process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S604 that the value N of the held ball number counter is “0” or less (NO), the series of processes is terminated and the process returns to the original process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S602 that the special symbol display device 93 is currently performing variable display (NO), the process moves to step S612, and the variable symbol display time of the special symbol display device 93 has elapsed. If it is determined that there is no change time (YES), the process proceeds to step S614.

  In step S614, the display of the special symbol display device 93 is updated. Specifically, among the LEDs 93a, for example, when the currently lit LED 93a is red until the variation time elapses after the variation starts, the red LED 93a is turned off and the green LED 93a is turned off. Set the display mode to light up. If the LED 93a that is currently lit is green, the display mode is set so that the green LED 93a is turned off and the blue LED 93a is turned on. When the LED 93a that is currently lit is blue, a display mode is set in which the blue LED 93a is turned off and the red LED 93a is turned on. Note that the process of step S614 is executed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 [ms]). However, if the lighting color of the LED 93a is changed for each execution, the player cannot visually recognize the change in the lighting color of the LED 93a. . Therefore, in order to make the player visually recognize the change in the lighting color of the LED 93a, the process of step S614 adds “1” to the value of the counter (not shown) each time it is executed, and the counter value is a predetermined value (for example, When “100”) is exceeded, the lighting color of the LED 93a is changed, and the lighting color of the LED 93a is changed at a period (for example, 4 [ms] × 100 = 0.4 [s]) that the player can visually recognize. It is preferable to carry out. The counter value returns to “0” when the lighting color of the LED 93a is changed.

When the process of step S614 ends, the series of processes ends and returns to the original process.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S612 that the variation time has elapsed for the variation display of the special symbol display device 93 (NO), the process proceeds to step S616, and the special symbol display device 93 is set to stop display. In the jackpot lottery, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and if the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot, the stoppage pattern for the jackpot type and jackpot based on the value of the jackpot type random number counter C2 Determine the type. In the process of step S616, the stop display of the special symbol display device 93 is set so that the display mode corresponds to the determined type of stop symbol at the time of the big hit. For example, the green LED 93a is lit when it is a non-probable big hit, the red LED 93a is lit when it is a probable big hit, and the blue LED 93a is lit when it is off. In addition, although the display of each LED 93a is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S618, and a confirmation command is set in the command buffer of the RAM 314 in order to synchronize the stop display of the effect symbol display device 91 with the lighting of the LED 93a. Thereby, in the external output process of step S500, the confirmation command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 143 via the output port 318.

When the process of step S618 ends, the series of processes ends and the original process is restored.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S600 that the game is currently a big hit (NO), the series of processes is terminated and the process returns to the original process.

Next, the variation start process in step S610 will be described.
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the variation start process executed by main controller 162.

  The variation start process is a process for starting variation display on the special symbol display device 93. When the variation start process is executed in step S610, the process proceeds to step S700 as shown in FIG.

In step S700, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot value is obtained by comparing the acquired random number counter value with the jackpot value. If it is determined that it is a big hit (YES), step S
The process moves to 702.

  In step S702, the value of the jackpot type random number counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is acquired, the jackpot type is determined based on the acquired random number counter value, and the jackpot type is determined based on the determined jackpot type. The display mode of the special symbol display device 93 at the time and the stop symbol type of the effect symbol are determined.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S704, and the variation pattern table 406 corresponding to the jackpot is read. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is acquired and corresponds to the jackpot, the determined jackpot type, the value N of the held ball number counter, and the acquired random number counter value. The address of the variation pattern table 406 is acquired from the distribution structure table 404, and the variation pattern table 406 is read based on the acquired address.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S706, where the value of the variation pattern random number counter CS stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is acquired, and in the read variation pattern table 406, from the record of the rank of the acquired random number counter value. The variation pattern number is read out, and the variation pattern at the big hit specified by the read variation pattern number is determined. Further, the variation time is determined for the variation display of the special symbol display device 93, and the variation time until the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed by the effect symbol display device 91 is determined. Specifically, each value of the reach random number counter C3 and the variation pattern random number counter CS stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is acquired, and based on the acquired value of the reach random number counter C3, normal reach, super reach In addition to determining the rough fluctuation time for special reach, etc., the fluctuation time (in other words, fluctuation) until the last stop symbol (medium symbol) is stopped and displayed after reach production based on the value of the obtained random pattern counter CS. Determine the number of symbols). Note that the variation time can be set using only the value of the reach random number counter C3 without using the value of the variation pattern random number counter CS. Whether to set each value of the counter C3 and the variation pattern random number counter CS can be appropriately determined according to the value of the reach random number counter C3, the gaming state, and the like each time.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S708, where the hit type information indicating the jackpot type determined in step S702 is set, and the process proceeds to step S710.

In step S710, it is determined whether or not the time-saving jackpot signal data is set in the command buffer, and if it is determined that the time-saving jackpot signal data is set (YES).
Shifts to step S712 to clear the hourly jackpot signal data set in the command buffer. Thereby, in the external output process of step S500, the output of the jackpot signal with time reduction is stopped.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S714, and a variation pattern command for designating the variation pattern determined in steps S706, S724, and S732 is set in the command buffer of the RAM 314. Thereby, in the external output process of step S500, the fluctuation pattern command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 143 via the output port 318.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S716, and a stop type command for designating the type of stop symbol determined in steps S702, S720, and S728 is set in the command buffer of the RAM 314. Thereby, in the external output process of step S500, the stop type command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 143 via the output port 318. In the external output process in step S500, since the commands are transmitted in the order in which they are set in the command buffer, the variation pattern command and the stop type command are transmitted in that order.

When the process of step S716 ends, the series of processes ends and the original process is restored.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S710 that the time-saving jackpot signal data is not set in the command buffer (NO), the process proceeds to step S714.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S700 that it is not a big hit (NO), the process proceeds to step S718, where the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is acquired, and the acquired random number counter By comparing the value and the small hit value, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit, and if it is determined that it is a small hit (YES), the process proceeds to step S720.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S720, and the display mode of the special symbol display device 93 at the time of small hitting and the stop symbol type of the effect symbol are determined.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S722, and the variation pattern table 406 corresponding to the small hit is read. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is acquired, and the fluctuation pattern table 406 corresponding to the small hit, the value N of the reserved ball number counter and the acquired random number counter value is obtained. Are obtained from the distribution structure table 404, and the variation pattern table 406 is read based on the obtained address.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S724, where the value of the variation pattern random number counter CS stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is acquired, and from the record of the rank of the acquired random number counter value in the read variation pattern table 406. The variation pattern number is read out, and the variation pattern at the time of a small hit specified by the read variation pattern number is determined. Further, the variation time is determined for the variation display of the special symbol display device 93, and the variation time until the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed by the effect symbol display device 91 is determined. Specifically, each value of the reach random number counter C3 and the variation pattern random number counter CS stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is acquired, and based on the acquired value of the reach random number counter C3, normal reach, super reach In addition to determining the rough fluctuation time for special reach, etc., the fluctuation time (in other words, fluctuation) until the last stop symbol (medium symbol) is stopped and displayed after reach production based on the value of the obtained random pattern counter CS. Determine the number of symbols). Note that the variation time can be set using only the value of the reach random number counter C3 without using the value of the variation pattern random number counter CS. Whether to set each value of the counter C3 and the variation pattern random number counter CS can be appropriately determined according to the value of the reach random number counter C3, the gaming state, and the like each time.

Next, the process proceeds to step S726, hit type information indicating a small hit is set, and the process proceeds to step S714.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S718 that it is not a small hit (NO), the process proceeds to step S728, and the display mode of the special symbol display device 93 and the stop symbol type of the effect symbol at the time of detachment are determined.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S730, and the fluctuation pattern table 406 corresponding to the deviation is read. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is acquired, and the value of the fluctuation pattern table 406 corresponding to the value N of the reserved ball number counter and the acquired random number counter value is removed. An address is acquired from the distribution structure table 404, and the variation pattern table 406 is read based on the acquired address.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S732, where the value of the variation pattern random number counter CS stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is acquired, and in the read variation pattern table 406, from the record of the rank of the acquired random number counter value. A fluctuation pattern number is read out, and a deviation fluctuation pattern specified by the read fluctuation pattern number is determined. Further, the variation time is determined for the variation display of the special symbol display device 93, and the variation time until the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed by the effect symbol display device 91 is determined. Specifically, each value of the reach random number counter C3 and the variation pattern random number counter CS stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is acquired, and based on the acquired value of the reach random number counter C3, normal reach, super reach In addition to determining the rough fluctuation time for special reach, etc., the fluctuation time (in other words, fluctuation) until the last stop symbol (medium symbol) is stopped and displayed after reach production based on the value of the obtained random pattern counter CS. Determine the number of symbols). Note that the variation time can be set using only the value of the reach random number counter C3 without using the value of the variation pattern random number counter CS. Whether to set each value of the counter C3 and the variation pattern random number counter CS can be appropriately determined according to the value of the reach random number counter C3, the gaming state, and the like each time.

When the process of step S732 ends, the process proceeds to step S714.
Next, the special winning opening / closing process of step S508 will be described.

  FIG. 30 and FIG. 31 are flowcharts showing the special prize opening opening / closing process executed by the main controller 162.

  The big prize opening / closing process is a process of opening or closing the big prize opening 83a when a big hit has occurred, and when executed in step S508, the process proceeds to step S800 as shown in FIG. .

In step S800, it is determined whether or not a non-probable variation jackpot or a probability variation jackpot based on the hit type information, and if it is determined that it is a non-probable variation jackpot or a probability variation jackpot (YES).
Moves to step S802.

In step S802, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the jackpot effect. If it is determined that it is time to start the jackpot effect (YES), the process proceeds to step S804.

In step S804, a jackpot presentation start process is executed for storing an opening command corresponding to a non-probable jackpot or a probable jackpot in the command buffer. Thereby, in the external output process of step S500, an opening command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 143 via the output port 318.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S806, and the time-saving jackpot signal data is stored in the command buffer. Thereby, in the external output process of step S500, a jackpot signal with a short time which becomes a HIGH level signal is output from the external terminal board 213. At this time, the main controller 162 latch circuit (not shown) outputs a time-saving jackpot signal after the time-saving jackpot signal is output so that a HIGH level signal is output until the time-saving jackpot signal data in the command buffer is cleared. The jackpot signal with a short time is latched for the processing execution period (for example, 4 [ms]). As a result, since the HIGH level signal is constantly output, it is easy to detect the jackpot signal with a short time in the calling lamp device 500. The same applies to the case where a time-saving jackpot signal is output in the external output processing in step S500.

When the process of step S806 ends, the series of processes ends and returns to the original process.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S802 that it is not the timing to start the jackpot effect (NO), as shown in FIG. 31, the process proceeds to step S836 to determine whether it is the timing to start the round, If it is determined that it is time to start the round (YES)
Proceeds to step S838.

  In step S838, a round start process for storing the round start command in the command buffer is executed. However, if it is a small hit, no round start command is set. Thereby, in the external output process of step S500, a round start command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 143 via the output port 318.

When the process of step S838 ends, the series of processes ends and returns to the original process.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S836 that it is not the timing to start the round (NO), the process proceeds to step S840, where it is determined whether the round is continuing, and it is determined that the round is continuing. If yes (YES), the process moves to step S842.

  In step S842, a large winning opening / closing control process for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening 83a is executed by the solenoid of the variable winning device 83, and a series of processes is terminated to return to the original process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S840 that the round is not continuing (NO), the process proceeds to step S844, where it is determined whether it is time to end the round, and it is determined that it is time to end the round. If yes (YES), the process moves to step S846.

  In step S846, “1” is added to the number of rounds, and the process proceeds to step S848 to determine whether the number of rounds exceeds the maximum number of rounds. If it is determined that the maximum number of rounds has been exceeded (YES), The process proceeds to step S850.

  In step S850, hit effect end processing is executed for storing an ending command corresponding to the non-probable big hit, the probable big hit, the JUB big hit, the sudden big hit, the latent big hit or the small hit in the command buffer. Thereby, in the external output process of step S500, the ending command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 143 via the output port 318.

When the process of step S850 ends, the series of processes ends and the original process is restored.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S848 that the number of rounds does not exceed the maximum number of rounds (NO), the process proceeds to step S852 to execute round end processing for storing a round end command in the command buffer. However, if it is a small hit, no round end command is set. Thereby, in the external output process of step S500, a round end command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 143 via the output port 318.

When the process of step S852 ends, the series of processes ends and the original process is restored.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S844 that it is not the timing to end the round (NO), the series of processes is terminated and the original process is restored.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30, when it is determined in step S800 that the non-probable big hit or the probable big hit is not (NO), the process proceeds to step S808.

In step S808, it is determined whether or not it is a JUB jackpot or an abrupt jackpot based on the hit type information, and if it is determined that it is a JUB jackpot or an abrupt jackpot (YES)
Moves to step S810.

In step S810, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the jackpot effect. If it is determined that it is time to start the jackpot effect (YES), the process proceeds to step S812.

  In step S812, a jackpot presentation start process for storing an opening command corresponding to the JUB jackpot or the sudden jackpot in the command buffer is executed. Thereby, in the external output process of step S500, an opening command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 143 via the output port 318.

When the process of step S812 ends, the series of processes ends and the original process is restored.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S810 that it is not the timing to start the jackpot effect (NO), the process proceeds to step S814 to determine whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the jackpot effect. If YES is determined (YES), the process proceeds to step S816.

  In step S816, the time-saving jackpot signal data is stored in the command buffer. Thereby, in the external output process of step S500, a jackpot signal with a short time which becomes a HIGH level signal is output from the external terminal board 213.

When the process of step S816 ends, the series of processes ends and returns to the original process.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S814 that the predetermined time has not elapsed since the start of the jackpot presentation (NO), the process proceeds to step S836 as shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30, when it is determined in step S808 that the hit is not JUB big hit or sudden big hit (NO), the process proceeds to step S818.

  In step S818, it is determined based on the hit type information whether or not the latent probability is a big hit. If it is determined that the latent probability is a big hit (YES), the process proceeds to step S820.

In step S820, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the jackpot effect. If it is determined that it is time to start the jackpot effect (YES), the process proceeds to step S822.

  In step S822, a jackpot presentation start process for storing an opening command corresponding to the latent jackpot in the command buffer is executed. Thereby, in the external output process of step S500, an opening command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 143 via the output port 318.

When the process of step S822 ends, the series of processes ends and the original process is restored.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S820 that it is not the timing to start the jackpot effect (NO), the process proceeds to step S824, where it is determined whether or not it is in a time-saving state, and if it is determined that it is in a time-saving state (YES) ) Proceeds to step S826.

  In step S826, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the big hit effect. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (YES), the process proceeds to step S828.

  In step S828, the time-saving jackpot signal data is stored in the command buffer. Thereby, in the external output process of step S500, a jackpot signal with a short time which becomes a HIGH level signal is output from the external terminal board 213.

When the process of step S828 ends, the series of processes ends and the original process is restored.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S826 that the predetermined time has not elapsed since the start of the jackpot effect (NO), and if it is determined in step S824 that the time is not short (NO), both are shown in FIG. As shown, the process proceeds to step S836.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30, when it is determined in step S818 that the latent probability is not a big hit (NO), the process proceeds to step S830.

  In step S830, it is determined whether or not a small hit is made based on the hit type information. If it is determined that a small hit is made (YES), the process proceeds to step S832.

In step S832, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the small hit effect. If it is determined that it is time to start the small hit effect (YES), the process proceeds to step S834.

  In step S834, a small hit effect start process for storing the opening command corresponding to the small hit in the command buffer is executed. Thereby, in the external output process of step S500, an opening command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 143 via the output port 318.

When the process of step S834 ends, the series of processes ends and returns to the original process.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S832 that it is not the timing to start the small hit effect (NO), the process proceeds to step S836 as shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30, when it is determined in step S830 that it is not a small hit (NO), the series of processes is terminated and the process returns to the original process.

Next, the configuration of the audio lamp control device 143 will be described.
FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the audio lamp control device 143.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the audio lamp control device 143 includes an MPU 350 that is a one-chip type microprocessor such as DIP, an input port 356 for inputting data from the outside of the audio lamp control device 143, and the audio lamp control device 143. And an output port 358 for outputting data to the outside. The MPU 350, the input port 356 and the output port 358 are connected to each other via a bus 360.

The MPU 350 includes a ROM 352 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 350 and fixed value data, a RAM 354 that functions as a work area for storing various data when the control program is executed, an interrupt circuit, and a timer circuit. And various circuits such as a data transmission / reception circuit.

  The RAM 354 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the MPU 350 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 350, and a work area (work for storing various flags, counters, I / O values, etc. Region).

The input port 356 is connected to the main control device 162, the operation buttons 35, and the like.
An audio output device 362, a lamp display device 364, a display control device 302, and the like are connected to the output port 358.

  When the MPU 350 receives a command for performing audio output control of the audio output device 362 from the main control device 162 via the input port 356, the MPU 350 controls the audio output device 362 based on the received command. The audio output device 362 outputs audio from the speaker unit 26 under the control of the audio lamp control device 143.

  When the MPU 350 receives a command for performing lamp display control of the lamp display device 364 from the main control device 162 via the input port 356, the MPU 350 controls the lamp display device 364 based on the received command. The lamp display device 364 turns on and blinks the annular illumination unit 23, the error display lamp unit 24, the prize ball lamp unit 25, and the holding lamps 95 and 96 under the control of the audio lamp control device 143.

  When the MPU 350 receives a command for performing display control of the display control device 302 from the main control device 162 via the input port 356, the MPU 350 controls the display control device 302 based on the received command. The display control device 302 performs display control of the effect symbol display device 91 under the control of the sound lamp control device 143.

  The command for performing the audio output control of the audio output device 362, the command for performing the lamp display control of the lamp display device 364, and the command for performing the display control of the display control device 302 are, for example, a variation pattern command. As described above, the command may be configured as one command (a command for performing display control of the audio output device 362, the lamp display device 364, and the display control device 302). In this case, the MPU 350 controls the lamp display device 364, the display control device 302, and the display control device 302 based on the received command.

Next, processing executed by the audio lamp control device 143 will be described.
The MPU 350 activates a control program stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 352 and executes an audio lamp control process. The sound lamp control process is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

First, the startup process will be described.
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing start-up processing executed by the audio lamp control device 143.

  The start-up process is a process activated when the power is turned on, and when executed in the MPU 350, the process proceeds to step S1100 as shown in FIG.

  In step S1100, an initial setting associated with power-on is performed. In the initial setting, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1102, and in order to determine whether or not the current start-up process is started during the execution of the power-off process (described later: S1230) due to an instantaneous voltage drop, If it is determined whether the power-off processing flag indicating whether or not the power is being cut off is turned off, and it is determined that the power-off processing flag is off (YES)
Determines that the power is not shut off during the power-off process, and the process proceeds to step S1104. If the power-off processing flag is off, this start-up processing is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure has occurred, the execution of the power-off processing is completed Or the MPU 350 is reset only due to the influence of noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main controller 162).

  In step S1104, it is determined whether the data in the RAM 354 has been destroyed. The determination of data destruction is performed as follows. In a specific area of the RAM 354, a predetermined value (for example, “55AAh”) is written as RAM destruction check data (described later: S1110). Therefore, if data is read from a specific area of the RAM 354 and the read data matches a predetermined value, it can be determined that the data in the RAM 354 is not destroyed. On the other hand, if the read data does not match the predetermined value, it can be determined that the data in the RAM 354 is destroyed.

  If the current startup process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the RAM destruction check data is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 354 (all data in the RAM 354 is cleared by turning off the power supply). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 354 is destroyed.

  On the other hand, when this startup process is started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process, or when the MPU 350 is reset only due to the influence of noise, etc. Since the RAM destruction check data is stored in the specific area of the RAM 354, it is determined that the data of the RAM 354 is not destroyed.

If it is determined in step S1104 that the data in the RAM 354 has been destroyed (YES)
Shifts to step S1106 to inspect all areas of the RAM 354. As an inspection method, first, “FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to determine whether it is “FFh”. If “FFh”, the RAM 354 is normal. judge. The writing and determination for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “AAh”, and “00h” after “FFh”. By this inspection, all areas of the RAM 354 are cleared to “0”.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1108, where it is determined whether the RAM 354 is normal as the inspection result in step S1106. If it is determined that the RAM 354 is normal (YES), the process proceeds to step S1110, and the RAM is destroyed. Check data (for example, “55AAh”) is written in a specific area of the RAM 354, and the process proceeds to step S1112.

  In step S1112, it is determined whether or not a power-off flag indicating whether or not power-off processing has been executed is on. Since the power-off flag is turned on when the power-off processing is executed, the process of step S1112 with the power-off flag turned on is the reason why the current startup process causes an instantaneous power outage. This is a case where the process is started after the power-off process is executed.

If it is determined in step S1112 that the power-off flag is turned on (YES), it is determined that the power-off processing has been executed, and the process proceeds to step S1114, where the sound lamp control device 14
In order to initialize each process of No. 3, the work area of the RAM 354 is cleared to “0”. Here, the work area of the RAM 354 refers to an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main controller 162. Note that the power-off flag is also turned off by the processing in step S1114.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S1116, the RAM 354 is initialized, the process proceeds to step S1118, the interrupt permission is set, and the process proceeds to the main process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1112 that the power-off flag is not turned on (NO), it is determined that the power-off process is not executed, and the process proceeds to step S1116. The reason why the process of step S1112 is reached in a state where the power-off flag is turned off is that the current startup process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, for example, and thus the process of steps S1106 to S1110 is performed. This is a case where the processing of step S1112 has been reached, or only the MPU 350 is reset due to the influence of noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 162). In this case, the process of step S1114 is not executed. If the process of step S1112 is reached via the process of steps S1106 to S1110, all the areas of the RAM 354 have already been cleared by the process of step S1106. If the start-up process is started by resetting only the MPU 350 due to the influence of noise or the like, the work area of the RAM 354 is not cleared, and the control of the sound lamp control device 143 is performed. It is because it can continue.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1108 that the RAM 354 is not normal (NO), the process proceeds to step S1120, the error display lamp unit 24 notifies the abnormality of the RAM 354, and the infinite loop is executed until the power supply is completely shut off. continue. Note that the sound output device 362 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 354.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1104 that the data in the RAM 354 has not been destroyed (NO), the process proceeds to step S1112.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1102 that the power-off process flag is not turned off (NO), it is determined that the power is being cut off during the power-off process, and the process proceeds to step S1106. When the power-off process flag is on, this startup process is started after a momentary power failure and the MPU 350 is reset during the power-off process. . In this case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 354 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since the control of the sound lamp control device 143 cannot be continued, the process proceeds to step S1106 and all areas of the RAM 354 are cleared.

Next, the main process will be described.
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the sound lamp control device 143.

  The main process is a process for performing the main control of the sound lamp control device 143. When the main process is executed in the MPU 350, the process proceeds to step S1200 as shown in FIG.

In step S1200, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 1 [ms]) has elapsed since the execution of the main process. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (YES), step S12 is performed.
Move to 02. In step S1200, it is determined whether or not the predetermined time has elapsed. Steps S1202 to S1214 are processes related to display, and a cycle shorter than the predetermined time (1 [
This is because it is preferable to execute the fluctuation control process in step S1216 and the command reception process in step S1218 in a short cycle. Thereby, omission of receiving commands from the main control device 162 can be prevented.

  In step S1202, the lighting pattern of the error display lamp unit 24 is set, and the outputs of the annular illumination unit 23 and the prize ball lamp unit 25 are set so as to be the lighting pattern set in the lamp setting process (described later: S1210). .

  Next, the process proceeds to step S1204, and a power-on notification process is executed. The power-on notification process is a process of notifying that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 [s]) when the power is turned on. The notification is performed by the audio output device 362 or the lamp display device 364. Do. In addition, a command for designating display of power supply on the effect symbol display device 91 may be transmitted to the display control device 302. If the power is not turned on, notification by the power-on notification process is not performed.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S1206, and when a demo command is received from the main control device 162 (described later: S1218), the demonstration symbol display device 91 transmits the received demo command to the display control device 302, thereby waiting for a demo. A customer waiting demonstration production process for starting production is executed. In the customer waiting demonstration effect process, the voice output device 362 and the lamp display device 364 are controlled based on the received demonstration command. The demo command is transmitted when the number of reserved balls is “0” and the effect symbol display device 91 finishes changing the effect symbol display. The customer-waiting demonstration will be introduced to the customer-waiting demonstration without any sense of incongruity based on the current screen status without suddenly changing the screen status of the stop pattern, background, character, effect, etc. The contents are set. Thereby, even if the customer waiting demonstration effect is started during the game, the possibility of giving the player a sense of incongruity can be reduced.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S1208, where it is determined whether or not the operation button 35 has been pressed. If it is determined that the operation button 35 has been pressed, the effect symbol display device 91 causes the button effect accompanying the pressing of the operation button 35. The operation button monitoring process is performed. In the operation button monitoring process, for example, when a notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, the operation button 35 is pressed to display the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation display, or the operation button 35 is pressed during the reach effect. By pressing it down, it can be changed to an effect that improves the expectation of jackpot. The operation button 35 can also be used as a button for determining one reach effect among a plurality of reach effects. If the operation button 35 is not provided on the pachinko machine 10, the process of step S1208 is omitted.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S1210, and lamp setting processing for setting lighting patterns of the annular illumination part 23 and the prize ball lamp part 25 is executed so as to correspond to the display of the effect symbol display device 91.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S1212 where the sound output pattern of the sound output device 362 is set so as to correspond to the display of the effect symbol display device 91, and the sound output from the sound output device 362 with the set sound output pattern. Execute the setting process.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S1214, and when a variation pattern command is received from the main control device 162 (described later: S1218), it synchronizes with the time required for the variation display of the effect symbol display device 91 based on the received variation pattern command. Liquid crystal effect execution management processing for setting time is executed. Based on this set time, the production time of the processing of steps S1210 and S1212 is set.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1216, and when a variation pattern command, a stop type command or a confirmation command is received from the main control device 162 (described later: S1218), the received variation pattern command, stop type command or confirmation command is displayed and controlled. A variation control process for controlling the variation display of the effect symbol display device 91 is performed by transmitting to the device 302. In the variation control process, the voice output device 362 and the lamp display device 364 are controlled based on the received variation pattern command, stop type command, or confirmation command.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S1218, where a command is received from the main control device 162, a received command is determined, and command reception processing for performing necessary processing such as flag setting is executed.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S1220, and it is determined whether or not the power failure flag indicating that the power cut has occurred is turned off. The power failure flag is turned on when a power-off command is received from the main controller 162.

If it is determined in step S1220 that the power failure flag is off (YES), it is determined that the power is not shut off, the process proceeds to step S1222, and the data stored in the RAM 354 is the same as the process in step S1104. Is determined to be destroyed, and if it is determined that the data in the RAM 354 is destroyed (YES), the process proceeds to step S1224.

  In step S1224, the error display lamp unit 24 notifies the abnormality of the RAM 354, and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off. Note that the sound output device 362 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 354.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1222 that the data in the RAM 354 has not been destroyed (NO), the process proceeds to step S1200.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1220 that the power failure flag has not been turned off (NO), it is determined that a power interruption has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S1226 in order to execute a power interruption process (described later: S1228). . The process of step S1220 is executed at the end of one cycle of the main process of the audio lamp control device 143. Therefore, since the power-off process is performed at the timing when each process is completed in the main process, it is not necessary to save the contents of the MPU 350 register to the stack area or store the stack pointer value in the power-off process. By setting a predetermined value to the stack pointer in the process of step S1100, it is possible to start from the process of step S1200 after the start-up process is completed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the sound lamp control device 143 and to perform relatively stable control without causing the sound lamp control device 143 to malfunction or run away.

  In step S1226, the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on, and the process proceeds to step S1228 to execute the power-off process. In the power-off process, interrupt prohibition is set, the outputs of the audio output device 362 and the lamp display device 364 are turned off, and the power failure flag is turned off.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S1230, the power-off processing flag is turned off, and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off.

  On the other hand, when it determines with predetermined time not having passed by step S1200 (NO), it transfers to step S1216.

Next, the configuration of the display control device 302 will be described.
FIG. 35 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the display control device 302.

  As shown in FIG. 35, the display control device 302 stores an MPU 370 that is a microprocessor, a program ROM 372 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 370 and fixed value data, and various data when the control program is executed. It has a work RAM 374 that functions as a work area for storing.

The display control device 302 further includes an image controller (VDP (Video Display Processor)) 376 that performs drawing processing on the effect symbol display device 91, and a DMAC (Direct Memory Access Controller) 378 that transfers data from the work RAM 374 to the image controller 376. And an input port 380 for inputting data from the outside of the display control device 302. The MPU 370, program ROM 372, work RAM 374, image controller 376, DMAC 378, and input port 380 are connected to each other via a bus 382.

  The display control device 302 further includes a character ROM 384 that stores background data, symbol data, character data, effect data, and the like, a video RAM 386 for storing display data to be output to the effect symbol display device 91, and the display control device 302. And an output port 388 for outputting data to the outside. The image controller 376 and the output port 388 are connected to each other via a bus 390.

An audio lamp control device 143 and the like are connected to the input port 380.
An effect symbol display device 91 and the like are connected to the output port 388.

  Note that the pachinko machine 10 is a different model that has the same design as that displayed on the effect symbol display device 91 even if it is a different model with different winning probabilities for winning the jackpot and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot. Therefore, the display control device 302 is made as a common part to reduce the cost.

  When the MPU 370 receives a command from the sound lamp control device 143 via the input port 380, the MPU 370 performs display control of the effect symbol display device 91 based on the received command.

  The work RAM 374 stores the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 370, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 370, and the like, and the work area (values of various flags, counters, I / Os, etc.). Working area).

  The work RAM 374 is provided with a counter buffer, similar to the RAM 314. The counter buffer stores the value of the stage random number counter for determining the stage at the time of the big hit effect or the small hit effect. The stage random number counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is stored in the counter buffer.

Next, the data structure of the program ROM 372 will be described.
The program ROM 372 stores a plurality of effect data tables for determining the big hit effect or the small hit effect and a distribution structure table for determining the effect data table.

First, the data structure of the distribution structure table will be described.
FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a part of the data structure of the distribution structure table 408.

  The effect data table is provided corresponding to each of the big hit and the small hit.

  The effect data table corresponding to the jackpot is provided corresponding to each of the JUB jackpot, the surprise jackpot and the latent jackpot.

  The production data table corresponding to JUB jackpot (hereinafter referred to as the JUB jackpot presentation data table) gives the player a higher game value than the copper stage, which has the expectation of giving game value to the player. It is provided for each of the three types of stages: a “silver” stage that gives the player the expectation to perform, and a “gold” stage that gives the player the expectation of giving a higher gaming value to the player. The JUB jackpot effect data table is provided for each predetermined numerical range of the stage random number counter. The larger the numerical value range assigned to one effect data table, the higher the possibility that the effect data table will be selected. In the example of FIG. 36, the selection ratio increases in the order of the effect data table 1 corresponding to the “gold” stage, the effect data table 2 corresponding to the “silver” stage, and the effect data table 3 corresponding to the “copper” stage. Therefore, when the JUB jackpot is won, the “gold” stage is most easily selected.

  Similarly, an effect data table corresponding to the surprise big hit (hereinafter referred to as the “accurate big hit effect data table”) is provided corresponding to each of the three stages of the “gold” stage, the “silver” stage, and the “copper” stage. It has been. The sudden hit effect data table is provided for each predetermined numerical range of the stage random number counter. In the example of FIG. 36, the selection ratio increases in the order of the effect data table 1 corresponding to the “gold” stage, the effect data table 2 corresponding to the “silver” stage, and the effect data table 3 corresponding to the “copper” stage. Therefore, when it is a big hit, the “gold” stage is most easily selected.

  Similarly, the performance data table corresponding to the potential big hit (hereinafter referred to as the potential big hit production data table) corresponds to each of the three stages of the “gold” stage, the “silver” stage, and the “copper” stage. Is provided. The latent probability hit effect data table is provided for each predetermined numerical range of the stage random number counter. In the example of FIG. 36, the selection ratio increases in the order of the effect data table 1 corresponding to the “silver” stage, the effect data table 2 corresponding to the “gold” stage, and the effect data table 3 corresponding to the “copper” stage. So, if you have a big hit, the “Silver” stage is most likely to be selected.

  Similarly, an effect data table corresponding to the small hits (hereinafter referred to as a small hit effect data table) is provided corresponding to each of the three stages of the “gold” stage, the “silver” stage, and the “copper” stage. It has been. The small hit effect data table is provided for each predetermined numerical range of the stage random number counter. In the example of FIG. 36, the selection ratio increases in the order of the effect data table 1 corresponding to the “copper” stage, the effect data table 2 corresponding to the “silver” stage, and the effect data table 3 corresponding to the “gold” stage. Therefore, if it is a small hit, the “copper” stage is most easily selected.

  In the distribution structure table 408, as shown in FIG. 36, addresses to the effect data table are registered for each of the big hit / small win, the game type, and the stage random number counter value. The non-probable big jackpot and the probable big jackpot do not correspond to the “gold” stage, the “silver” stage, and the “copper” stage, but similarly, addresses to the effect data table are registered.

Next, the data structure of the effect data table will be described.
FIG. 37 shows the data structure of the effect data table 410. As shown in FIG.

  In the effect data table 410, as shown in FIG. 37, a plurality of effect data for realizing one big hit effect or small hit effect in the effect symbol display device 91 is registered in time series. START data indicating the start of effect data is registered in the first record, and END data indicating the end of effect data is registered in the last record. The effect data is registered in a record between the START data and the END data. In each record, a symbol position, a background type, a character type, an effect, and the like are registered as effect data.

  The effect data table 410 used for the effect is read from the program ROM 372 and set in the table buffer of the work RAM 374. In the initial state set in the table buffer, a pointer is set at the first record of the effect data table 410. Then, while adding the pointer by “1”, the effect data of the record pointed to by the pointer is sequentially acquired, and display control of the effect symbol display device 91 is performed based on the acquired effect data.

Next, processing executed by the display control apparatus 302 will be described.
The MPU 370 activates a control program stored in a predetermined area of the program ROM 372 and executes display control processing. The display control process is roughly divided into a command interrupt process that is periodically activated, a V interrupt process that is activated by input of a V interrupt signal, and a main process.

First, command interrupt processing will be described.
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the display control device 302.

  The command interrupt process is a process executed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 [ms]). When the command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 370, the process proceeds to step S1300 as shown in FIG. Note that the command interrupt process may be configured not as a timer interrupt but as a process activated when a command strobe signal is received.

  In step S1300, it is determined whether a command has been received from the audio lamp control device 143. If it is determined that a command has been received (YES), the process proceeds to step S1302.

  In step S1302, the received command is stored in the ring buffer. The ring buffer is a storage area logically configured in a ring shape. In the initial state, an input pointer and a read pointer are set at the beginning of the ring buffer.

  In the case of storing a command, when the command is received, the command is stored in a 2-byte area indicated by the input pointer. Then, by adding “1” to the input pointer, the input pointer moves by one to the end side of the ring buffer. When a command is stored in the end region of the ring buffer, the input pointer is set again at the start end of the ring buffer.

On the other hand, when reading a command, the command is read from the 2-byte area indicated by the read pointer. Then, by adding “1” to the read pointer, the read pointer moves by one to the end side of the ring buffer. When a command is read from the end region of the ring buffer, the read pointer is set again at the start end of the ring buffer. The read pointer is not set ahead of the input pointer, but is set at the same position as the input pointer or behind it. If it is at the same position as the input pointer, it means that all the commands in the ring buffer have been processed. If it is located behind the input pointer, it means that an unprocessed new command exists in the ring buffer.

  The moving unit of the input pointer and the read pointer may be 1 byte. That is, a 2-byte command may be input byte by byte and read byte by byte.

  When the process of step S1302 ends, the series of processes ends and returns to the original process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1300 that the command is not received (NO), the series of processes is terminated and the process returns to the original process.

Next, the V interrupt process will be described.
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the display control device 302.

  The V interrupt process is a process activated when a V interrupt signal is input from the image controller 376. When the V interrupt process is executed in the MPU 370, the process proceeds to step S1400 as shown in FIG.

In step S1400, it is determined whether or not a new command exists in the ring buffer. If it is determined that a new command exists (YES), the process proceeds to step S1402, and the new command is read from the ring buffer, and the process proceeds to step S1404. Transition.

In step S1404, it is determined whether or not the new command read in step S1402 is an opening command. If it is determined that the new command is an opening command (YES), the process proceeds to step S1406.

  In step S1406, it is determined whether or not the game type is non-probabilistic big hit or probable big jackpot by determining whether the opening command read in step S1402 corresponds to non-probable big jackpot or probable big jackpot. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is a non-probable big hit or a probable big hit (YES), the process proceeds to step S1408.

  In step S1408, the address of the effect data table 410 corresponding to the non-probable big hit or the probable big hit is acquired from the distribution structure table 408, and the effect data table 410 is read from the program ROM 372 based on the acquired address, and the process proceeds to step S1410. Then, the read effect data table 410 is set in the table buffer of the work RAM 374, and the process proceeds to step S1412.

  In step S1412, a display setting process for performing display setting of the effect symbol display device 91 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1414, a display execution process for executing display on the effect symbol display device 91 is performed, and the process proceeds to step S1416. .

  In step S1416, the stage random number counter is updated. Specifically, “1” is added to the value of the stage random number counter, and “0” is set when the maximum value is exceeded. Then, the update value of the stage random number counter is stored in the counter buffer.

  When the process of step S1416 ends, the series of processes ends and returns to the original process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1406 that it is not a non-probable variation jackpot or a probability variation jackpot (NO), the process proceeds to step S1418.

  In step S1418, based on the opening command read in step S1402, it is determined whether the game type is JUB big hit, sudden hit big hit, latent big hit or small hit. Then, the address of the effect data table 410 corresponding to the determined game type is acquired from the distribution structure table 408, and the effect data table 410 is read from the program ROM 372 based on the acquired address.

When the process of step S1418 ends, the process proceeds to step S1410.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1404 that the new command read in step S1402 is not an opening command (NO), the process proceeds to step S1420, and other command processing for processing other commands is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1412. To do.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1400 that a new command does not exist (NO), the series of processes is terminated and the process returns to the original process.

Next, the main process will be described.
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the display control device 302.

  The main process is a process for performing main control of the display control apparatus 302. When the main process is executed in the MPU 370, the process proceeds to step S1500 as shown in FIG.

  In step S1500, initial setting is performed upon power-on. In the initial setting, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S1502, interrupt permission is set, and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off.

Next, the external configuration of the call lamp device 500 will be described.
FIG. 41 is a front view of the calling lamp device 500. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 41, the call lamp device 500 includes a display unit 502 that displays the number of jackpots, the number of probability variation states, the number of symbol variations, and other game information, and a call button 504 for calling employees of pachinko halls. And a call lamp 506 that blinks when the call button 504 is pressed.

Next, the configuration of the control system of the call lamp device 500 will be described.
FIG. 42 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the control system of call lamp device 500.

  As shown in FIG. 42, the call lamp device 500 outputs a signal to the control unit 508 that controls the call lamp device 500, the signal input unit 510 that receives an output signal from the external terminal board 213, and the hall computer 530. And a signal output unit 512.

  A display unit 502, a call button 504, and a call lamp 506 are connected to the control unit 508.

The external terminal board 213 includes a jackpot signal that is at a high level during a jackpot presentation, a special symbol confirmation signal that indicates the establishment of a special symbol, a jackpot signal with a short time, and a jackpot and small that are at a high level during a jackpot presentation or a jackpot presentation. A winning signal, a start opening winning signal that is at a high level when a game ball is won at the starting winning opening 84, and a winning ball signal that is at a high level when the winning ball is paid out are output. The signal input unit 510 inputs the signals output from the external terminal board 213, respectively.

  The signal output unit 512 outputs the signals input from the signal input unit 510 to the hall computer 530, respectively.

[Operation] Next, the operation of the present embodiment will be described.
First, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control unit 162 executes main control processing and enters a gameable state. A player can play a game by loading the rented game ball into the pachinko machine 10 and operating the game ball launch handle 41 to launch the game ball into the game area of the game board 81.

  When the game ball launched into the game area wins the start winning opening 84, the start winning opening sensor 154 outputs a detection signal. In the main controller 162, when a detection signal is input from the start winning port sensor 154, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is acquired at that timing. At this time, if the acquired random number counter value matches the jackpot value, it is a jackpot.

  When the jackpot is reached, through steps S702 to S706, the jackpot type, the stop symbol type of the effect symbol at the jackpot time, and the variation pattern at the jackpot time are determined. Then, the effect symbol is variably displayed with the variation pattern at the time of the jackpot, and the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with the jackpot symbol after a predetermined variation time has elapsed. After the effect symbol is stopped and displayed, any of non-probable big hit, probable big hit, JUB big hit, sudden big hit and latent big hit will occur.

(1) Non-probable variation jackpot Next, a case where an uncertain variation jackpot occurs will be described.
FIG. 43 is a time chart showing a jackpot effect corresponding to a non-probable jackpot and a probable jackpot.

  When the non-probable big hit is obtained, the main control unit 162 first passes through steps S702 to S706, S714, and S716, as shown in FIG. It is transmitted to the display control apparatus 302 via 143.

  In the display control device 302, when the variation pattern command is received, an effect data table corresponding to the received variation pattern command is read out and set in the table buffer through steps S1420 and S1412 to S1416. Then, the effect data in the effect data table is expanded, and based on the expanded effect data, the effect symbols are displayed in a variable pattern with a variation pattern at the time of the uncertain change big hit.

  When the display control device 302 receives the stop type command, the stop design table corresponding to the received stop type command is read through steps S1420 and S1412-S1416, and the uncertain change is made based on the read stop design table. The symbol is determined as the stop symbol, and the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with the determined non-probable variable symbol.

  In main controller 162, when a predetermined variation time has elapsed after transmission of the variation pattern command and the stop type command, a confirmation command is transmitted to display control device 302.

When receiving the confirmation command, the display control device 302 reads the effect data table for confirmation display through steps S1420 and S1412 to S1416 and sets it in the table buffer. Then, the effect data in the effect data table is expanded, and the effect symbol is determined and displayed based on the expanded effect data.

  In main controller 162, when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 [s]) elapses after transmission of the confirmation command, opening command 1 corresponding to the uncertain change big hit is transmitted to display control unit 302 through step S804. . At substantially the same time, a time-saving jackpot signal is output through step S806. Therefore, since the number of jackpots is displayed with “1” added in the call lamp device 500, the player can grasp that the jackpot has occurred by looking at the display of the call lamp device 500.

  When receiving the opening command 1, the display control apparatus 302 acquires the address of the effect data table 410 corresponding to the uncertain change big hit from the distribution structure table 408 through steps S1408 and S1410, and produces the effect based on the obtained address. The data table 410 is read and set in the table buffer. Then, the effect data in the effect data table is developed, and the jackpot effect corresponding to the uncertain change jackpot is started based on the developed effect data.

  During the jackpot presentation, the long open round is continued until the predetermined condition is satisfied with the upper limit being 15 times. In main controller 162, through steps S838 and S852, a round start command is transmitted at the start of a round, and a round end command is transmitted at the end of the round.

  In the display control device 302, when the round start command and the round end command are received, processing during the jackpot presentation is executed based on the received round start command and round end command.

  Further, during the jackpot presentation, when the big winning opening 83a is opened with a predetermined opening / closing pattern and a game ball is won in the big winning opening 83a, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out as one winning ball.

  When the final round ends, main controller 162 transmits ending command 1 corresponding to the uncertain change big hit through step S850.

  In the display control device 302, when the ending command 1 is received, the jackpot effect ends based on the received ending command 1 through step S1420.

  In the main controller 162, when a predetermined time (for example, 6 [s]) has elapsed after the transmission of the ending command 1, if the number of reserved balls is “1” or more, a variation pattern command is transmitted. At this time, the output of the time-saving jackpot signal is stopped through step S712. Moreover, it shifts to a time-short state.

(2) Probability variation jackpot Next, the case where probability variation jackpot occurs will be described.
When the probability variation jackpot occurs, as shown in FIG. 43, the same operation as that when the non-probability variation jackpot occurs is performed. The time-saving jackpot signal is output almost simultaneously with the transmission of the opening command 2 corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, and stops almost simultaneously with the transmission of the first variation pattern command after the jackpot presentation ends. The difference is that after the jackpot effect is finished, the state is shifted to a certain change state.

(3) JUB jackpot Next, a case where a JUB jackpot occurs will be described.
FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a screen of the effect symbol display device 91.

FIG. 45 is a time chart showing the jackpot effect corresponding to the JUB jackpot.
When the JUB jackpot is reached, the main control device 162 transmits a variation pattern command and a stop type command corresponding to the JUB jackpot to the display control device 302. When a predetermined variation time has elapsed from there, a confirmation command is sent to the display control device 302. Sent.

  When the display control device 302 receives the variation pattern command, as shown in FIG. 44 (a), the variation display of the effect symbol is performed with the variation pattern at the time of JUB big hit. Further, when the stop type command is received, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with the random symbol. When the confirmation command is received, the effect symbol is confirmed and displayed.

  In main controller 162, as shown in FIG. 45, opening command 3 corresponding to JUB jackpot is transmitted to display controller 302 through step S812.

  Upon receiving the opening command 3, the display control device 302 acquires the address of the effect data table 410 corresponding to the JUB jackpot from the distribution structure table 408 via steps S1418 and S1410, and the effect data based on the acquired address. The table 410 is read and set in the table buffer. Then, the effect data in the effect data table is expanded, and the jackpot effect corresponding to the JUB jackpot is started based on the expanded effect data.

  When the jackpot production is started, as shown in FIG. 44 (c), in order to select one of the “gold” stage, the “silver” stage, and the “copper” stage, the letters “gold”, “silver” A character and a “copper” character are displayed large on the screen of the effect symbol display device 91, and each character is blinked. For example, when the “gold” stage is selected, the effect symbol display device 91 displays that the “gold” stage has been selected, as shown in FIG. After that, since the current game type is JUB jackpot, an effect that the screen of the effect symbol display device 91 is broken is passed through the effect symbol display device 91 as shown in FIG. Is displayed. During this time, it is approximately 25 [s].

  When the occurrence of the jackpot is displayed, the main controller 162 outputs a jackpot signal with a short time through step S816. That is, in the JUB jackpot, a time-saving jackpot signal is output 25 seconds after the opening command 3 is transmitted. Therefore, in the calling lamp device 500, the number of jackpots does not change until the occurrence of the jackpot is displayed, so that the player can grasp that the JUB jackpot has occurred even when viewing the display of the calling lamp device 500. Can not. As a result, the player can expect that a JUB jackpot will occur until a predetermined time has elapsed even if the confident symbol is stopped and displayed, thereby reducing the possibility that the game taste will decrease. it can.

  On the other hand, during the jackpot production, first, the short open round is repeated 15 times. The main controller 162 transmits a round start command at the start of the short open round and a round end command at the end of the short open round.

  Next, the long open round is continued until the predetermined condition is satisfied with the upper limit being 14 times. In main controller 162, through steps S838 and S852, a round start command is transmitted at the start of a round, and a round end command is transmitted at the end of the round.

In the display control device 302, when the round start command and the round end command are received, processing during the jackpot presentation is executed based on the received round start command and round end command.

  When the final round ends, main controller 162 transmits ending command 3 corresponding to JUB jackpot through step S850.

  In the display control device 302, when the ending command 3 is received, the jackpot effect ends based on the received ending command 3 through step S1420.

  In the main controller 162, when a predetermined time (for example, 6 [s]) has elapsed after the transmission of the ending command 3, if the number of reserved balls is “1” or more, a variation pattern command is transmitted. At this time, the output of the time-saving jackpot signal is stopped through step S712. Moreover, it shifts to the probability variation state.

(4) Sudden big hit Next, the case where the big big hit has occurred will be described. Since the transmission / reception operations of the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the confirmation command are the same as when a JUB jackpot has occurred, the transmission / reception operation of the opening command 4 corresponding to the sudden jackpot will be described.

FIG. 46 is a time chart showing a jackpot effect corresponding to the surprise jackpot.
In main controller 162, as shown in FIG. 46, opening command 4 is transmitted to display controller 302 through step S812.

  When the display control device 302 receives the opening command 4, through steps S1418 and S1410, the address of the effect data table 410 corresponding to the sudden hit is acquired from the distribution structure table 408, and the effect data is based on the acquired address. The table 410 is read and set in the table buffer. Then, the effect data in the effect data table is expanded, and the jackpot effect corresponding to the sudden hit is started based on the expanded effect data.

  When the jackpot effect is started, as shown in FIG. 44 (c), the characters “Gold”, “Silver”, and “Copper” are displayed in large size on the screen of the effect symbol display device 91, respectively. The characters are flashing. For example, when the “gold” stage is selected, the effect symbol display device 91 displays that the “gold” stage has been selected, as shown in FIG. After that, since the current game type is a sudden big hit, the effect symbol display device 91 may shift to the probability change state as shown in FIG. 44 (f) through an effect that the screen of the effect symbol display device 91 is broken. Is displayed. During this time, it is approximately 25 [s].

  When the transition to the probability changing state is displayed, the main controller 162 outputs a time-saving jackpot signal through step S816. That is, in the sudden hit jackpot, a short hit jackpot signal is output 25 seconds after the opening command 4 is transmitted. Therefore, in the calling lamp device 500, the number of jackpots does not change until the transition to the probability change state is displayed, so that the player understands that the sudden jackpot has occurred even when viewing the display of the calling lamp device 500. I can't. As a result, the player can expect the occurrence of a sudden big hit until a predetermined time has elapsed even if the suspicion symbol is stopped and displayed, so that the possibility of a decrease in the game taste may be reduced. it can.

  On the other hand, during the big hit effect, the short open round is continued up to 15 times. In main controller 162, through steps S838 and S852, a round start command is transmitted at the start of a round, and a round end command is transmitted at the end of the round.

  In the display control device 302, when the round start command and the round end command are received, processing during the jackpot presentation is executed based on the received round start command and round end command.

  When the final round is completed, the main control device 162 transmits an ending command 4 corresponding to the sudden big hit through step S850.

  In the display control device 302, when the ending command 4 is received, the jackpot effect ends based on the received ending command 4 through step S1420.

  When a predetermined time (for example, 6 [s]) elapses after transmission of ending command 4, main controller 162 transmits a variation pattern command when the number of reserved balls is “1” or more. At this time, the output of the time-saving jackpot signal is stopped through step S712. Moreover, it shifts to the probability variation state.

(5) Latent probability big hit Next, a case where a latent big hit has occurred will be described. Note that the transmission / reception operations of the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the confirmation command are the same as when a JUB jackpot has occurred, and will be described from the transmission / reception operation of the opening command 5 corresponding to the latent jackpot.

FIG. 47 is a time chart showing a jackpot effect corresponding to the latent jackpot.
In main controller 162, as shown in FIG. 47, opening command 5 is transmitted to display controller 302 through step S822.

  Upon receiving the opening command 5, the display control device 302 acquires the address of the effect data table 410 corresponding to the latent probability big hit from the distribution structure table 408 via steps S1418 and S1410, and effects based on the acquired address. The data table 410 is read and set in the table buffer. Then, the effect data in the effect data table is developed, and the jackpot effect corresponding to the latent big hit is started based on the developed effect data.

  When the jackpot effect is started, as shown in FIG. 44 (c), the characters “Gold”, “Silver”, and “Copper” are displayed in large size on the screen of the effect symbol display device 91, respectively. The characters are flashing. For example, when the “gold” stage is selected, the effect symbol display device 91 displays that the “gold” stage has been selected, as shown in FIG. After that, since the current game type is a potential big hit, the player enters the round without performing a specific display.

  With a latent jackpot, a jackpot signal with a short time is not output. Therefore, since the number of jackpots does not change in the call lamp device 500, the player cannot grasp that the potential jackpot has occurred even when viewing the display on the call lamp device 500. Accordingly, the player can expect the occurrence of a latent big hit when the suspicion symbol is stopped and displayed, so that the possibility that the game taste is lowered can be reduced.

  However, if it is in the time-saving state, a jackpot signal with a time-saving is output after step S828 and 25 [s] after the opening command 5 is transmitted. In this case, the same operation as that of the sudden hit is performed.

  On the other hand, during the big hit effect, the short open round is continued up to 15 times. In main controller 162, through steps S838 and S852, a round start command is transmitted at the start of a round, and a round end command is transmitted at the end of the round.

  In the display control device 302, when the round start command and the round end command are received, processing during the jackpot presentation is executed based on the received round start command and round end command.

  When the final round is completed, main controller 162 transmits ending command 5 corresponding to the latent probability big hit through step S850.

  In the display control device 302, when the ending command 5 is received, the jackpot effect ends based on the received ending command 5 through step S1420.

  In the main controller 162, when a predetermined time (for example, 6 [s]) has elapsed after the transmission of the ending command 5, the state shifts to a probability change state.

(6) Small hit On the other hand, in the main controller 162, if the obtained random number counter value matches the small hit value, the small hit is made.

  Next, a case where a small hit occurs will be described. Note that the transmission / reception operations of the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the confirmation command are the same as when a JUB jackpot has occurred, and will be described from the transmission / reception operation of the opening command “small” corresponding to the jackpot.

FIG. 48 is a time chart showing the small hit effect.
In main controller 162, as shown in FIG. 48, the opening command “small” is transmitted to display controller 302 through step S834.

  When the display control device 302 receives the opening command “small”, the address of the effect data table 410 corresponding to the small hit is acquired from the distribution structure table 408 through steps S1418 and S1410, and based on the acquired address. The effect data table 410 is read and set in the table buffer. Then, the effect data in the effect data table is expanded, and the small hit effect is started based on the expanded effect data.

  When the small hit effect is started, as shown in FIG. 44 (c), the characters “Gold”, “Silver”, and “Copper” are each displayed large on the screen of the effect symbol display device 91. Each character is displayed blinking. For example, when the “gold” stage is selected, the effect symbol display device 91 displays that the “gold” stage has been selected, as shown in FIG. After that, since the current game type is a small hit, the player enters the small hit effect without performing a specific display.

  With a small hit, a jackpot signal with a short time is not output. Therefore, since the number of jackpots does not change in the call lamp device 500, even if the player sees the display of the call lamp device 500, the player cannot grasp that the jackpot has occurred. As a result, the player cannot be distinguished from the potential big hit when the suspicion symbol is stopped and displayed, and can expect the occurrence of the potential big hit, thus reducing the game preference. The possibility can be reduced.

  On the other hand, during the small hit effect, the short opening is continued up to 15 times. When the final release ends, main controller 162 transmits an ending command “small” corresponding to the small hit through step S850.

  When the display control device 302 receives the ending command “small”, through step S1420, the small hit effect ends based on the received ending command “small”.

In the main control device 162, a predetermined time (for example, 6 [
When s]) elapses, the original state is restored. For example, the probability variation state and the time reduction state are maintained in the probability variation state and the time reduction state, and the normal state and non-time reduction state are maintained in the normal state and the non-time reduction state.

(7) Outgoing On the other hand, in the main controller 162, if the acquired random number counter value does not match the big hit value and the small hit value, the main control device 162 is out.

  When it comes off, steps S728 to S732 are used to determine the stop symbol type of the effect symbol at the time of removal and the variation pattern at the time of removal. Then, the effect symbol is variably displayed with the variation pattern at the time of detachment, and the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with the detachment symbol after a predetermined variation time has elapsed.

  [Effects] Thus, in the present embodiment, the height of the push operation unit 624b is set higher than that of the push operation unit 624a.

  Thereby, even if the overall width of the connection terminal device 600 is reduced, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the adjacent pushing operation unit 624a will be pushed in at the same time, and therefore, the connection of the wiring 606b as compared with the conventional case. Becomes easy.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the length in the front-rear direction of the push operation unit 624b is set shorter than that of the push operation unit 624a.

  Thereby, even if the overall width of the connection terminal device 600 is reduced, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the adjacent push operation unit 624a is accidentally pushed in at the same time, so that the connection of the wiring 606b is further facilitated.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a coil spring 612a that biases the swing operation member 610a toward the terminal plate 608a is provided.

  Thereby, since the wiring 606a is sandwiched between the pressing portion 628a and the terminal plate 608a by the elastic force of the coil spring 612a, the wiring 606a and the terminal plate 608a can be more reliably connected. The same effect can be obtained for the wiring connection portion 604b.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a restricting portion 634a for restricting the expansion / contraction direction of the coil spring 612a is formed on the side surface between both end portions of the swing operation member 610a and facing the front surface 602b of the base body 602.

  Thereby, since the expansion / contraction operation of the coil spring 612a is restricted by the restriction part 634a, the swing operation member 610a can be appropriately biased toward the terminal plate 608a. The same effect can be obtained for the wiring connection portion 604b.

Further, in the present embodiment, the swing operation member 610a includes the pressing portion 628a and the swing support shaft 62.
A valley portion 630a that is recessed inward is formed on the surface between 2a and facing the terminal plate 608a.

  Thereby, when the swing operation member 610a is swung downward, a space is formed between the pressing portion 628a and the terminal plate 608a, and therefore the wiring 606a can be easily inserted. The same effect can be obtained for the wiring connection portion 604b.

  Further, in the present embodiment, passages 636a and 638a are formed that restrict the movement of the swing operation member 610a toward the terminal plate 608a at a position where the tip of the pressing portion 628a approaches or contacts the terminal plate 608a.

  Thereby, the possibility that the pressing portion 628a excessively presses and damages the wiring 606a can be reduced. The same effect can be obtained for the wiring connection portion 604b.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a claw 626a that protrudes upward is formed at the top end of the push operation portion 624a.

  Thereby, since it is only necessary to put the finger on the nail 626a and push the push operation part 624a, the push operation part 624a becomes easy to operate. The same effect can be obtained for the wiring connection portion 604b.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the height of the claw 626b is set higher than that of the claw 626a.

  As a result, it is difficult to put a finger on the pushing operation portion 624b having a short length in the front-rear direction. However, since the height of the nail 626b is higher than that of the nail 626a, it becomes easier to put the finger on the nail 626b. It becomes easy to operate.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, an electrode 640a that bends forward is formed at the center of the upper end of the terminal plate 608a.

  Accordingly, the wiring 606a can easily come into contact with the electrode 640a, so that the wiring 606a and the terminal plate 608a can be more reliably connected. The same effect can be obtained for the wiring connection portion 604b.

  Further, in this embodiment, claws 642a projecting upward are formed on both sides of the electrode 640a on the upper end portion of the terminal plate 608a, and each claw 642a is formed on the inner wall of the upper surface 602e of the base 602. It is fitted in the fitting hole.

  Thereby, even if the electrode 640a is formed on the upper end portion of the terminal plate 608a, the terminal plate 608a can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction. The same effect can be obtained for the wiring connection portion 604b.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a tongue-like member 644a that projects rearward and obliquely downward is formed at the center of the rising portion of the terminal plate 608a, and the tongue-like member 644a is a fitting formed on the inner wall of the back surface 602a of the base 602. It is fitted in the hole.

  Thereby, it can control that terminal board 608a moves to the direction of order. The same effect can be obtained for the wiring connection portion 604b.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, two electrodes 648a extending obliquely upward in the front direction are formed in the lower portion of the terminal plate 608a, and each electrode 648a is formed on the inner wall on the left and right side surfaces 602c and 602d side of the base 602. It is installed on the protrusion.

  Thereby, it can control that terminal board 608a moves below. The same effect can be obtained for the wiring connection portion 604b.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the wiring connection portions 604a and 604b arranged to face each other are colored in the same color.

  This makes it easy to identify the wiring connection portion 604a or the wiring connection portion 604b to be paired, so that the possibility of erroneous connection of the wirings 606a and 606b can be reduced.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the wiring connection portions 604a and 604b arranged adjacent to each other are colored in different colors.

  As a result, the adjacent wiring connection portions 604a and 604b can be easily distinguished, so that the possibility of erroneous connection of the wirings 606a and 606b can be further reduced.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the wiring connection portions 604a and 604b are colored in different colors in other combinations in the adjacent direction.

  Thereby, since each wiring connection part 604a, 604b becomes easy to distinguish, possibility that the wiring 606a, 606b will be connected accidentally can further be reduced.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the winning winning lot 84 for generating a non-probable big hit, a probable big jackpot or a latent big jackpot is performed in response to a winning at the start winning opening 84, and the staged symbol display device 91 displays the staged symbols in a variable manner. If it is determined that a non-probable jackpot or a probabilistic jackpot will be generated, the production symbol is stopped and displayed with a non-probable symbol or a probabilistic symbol, a non-probable jackpot or a probabilistic jackpot is generated, a time-saving jackpot signal is output, When it is determined that a promising big hit is to be generated, the effect design is stopped and displayed with a sudden design that is difficult to distinguish from the losing symbol, a latent big hit is generated, and a time-saving jackpot signal is not output.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, for example, a jackpot signal indicating that a jackpot has been generated when a jackpot is generated is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-302145). In the calling lamp device 500, the number of jackpots is totalized and displayed based on the jackpot signal from the gaming machine.

  However, in the case of a conventional game machine, in the case of a sudden big hit, the purpose is to give unexpectedness as if it suddenly shifted to a probable change state without making a big hit, , Because a short hit jackpot signal is output when a sudden jackpot is generated, the player can grasp that the jackpot jackpot has occurred by looking at the display on the calling lamp device 500, and the game's taste is reduced. There was a problem.

Conventionally, for example, as another game type, when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed to generate a very short hit, and then a small hit that does not change the gaming state is set, the player sees the winning symbol. It is not possible to distinguish whether it is a big hit or a small hit, and we have the expectation that a big hit will occur. However, since a jackpot signal with a short time is output to the calling lamp device 500 when the sudden jackpot is generated, the player can confirm that the sudden jackpot or the small jackpot has occurred by looking at the display on the calling lamp device 500. There was a problem that it was possible to grasp and the taste of the game decreased.

  Also, conventionally, for example, when displaying that a big hit has occurred after the occurrence of a big hit, the player does not know whether or not the big hit has occurred until he sees the display, and a big hit will occur. Expect to do it. However, since a jackpot signal with a short time is output to the calling lamp device 500 when a sudden jackpot occurs, if the player sees the display on the calling lamp device 500 even before the display, the player can hit the jackpot. There was a problem that it was possible to grasp what occurred, and the taste of the game decreased.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, when it is determined that a non-probable big jackpot or a probable big jackpot is generated, a time-saving jackpot signal is output, whereas when it is determined that a latent big jackpot is generated, Since the time-saving jackpot signal is not output, the player cannot grasp that the potential jackpot has occurred even when viewing the display on the calling lamp device 500. In addition, when the small hit is set, the player cannot grasp that the latent big hit or the small hit has occurred even when viewing the display on the calling lamp device 500. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game taste is reduced as compared with the conventional case.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a probability variation state in which the winning probability of the big hit lottery is higher than the normal state is generated as the latent big hit.

  As a result, when the production symbol is stopped and displayed with a random symbol that is indistinguishable from the missed symbol, and a probability variation state in which the winning probability of the big hit lottery is higher than the normal state occurs, the time-saving big hit signal is not output, so the game The possibility that the taste is lowered can be further reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that a latent big hit is generated in the time-short state, a short-time big hit signal is output.

  As a result, even if it is determined that a latent big hit is generated, if it is in the time-saving state, a time-saving big hit signal is output, so that it is possible to grasp that the time-short state has occurred in the calling lamp device 500.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, when it is determined that a latent jackpot will be generated in the time-short state, the time-spanning is delayed with respect to the timing of outputting the time-spotted jackpot signal when a non-probable jackpot or a probabilistic jackpot is generated. Output a jackpot signal.

  As a result, if it is determined that a latent jackpot will be generated in the time-short state, the jackpot signal with a time-shortening is output with a delay. It is not possible to immediately know that the big hit has occurred. Therefore, possibility that the taste of a game will fall can be reduced.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, when it is determined that a JUB jackpot will be generated, the production symbol is stopped and displayed with a random symbol that is indistinguishable from the off symbol, a JUB jackpot is generated, and an uncertain variable jackpot or a probability variable jackpot is generated. Sometimes the time-saving jackpot signal is output with a delay from the timing of outputting the time-saving jackpot signal.

As a result, when it is determined that a non-probable jackpot or a probabilistic jackpot is generated, a time-saving jackpot signal is output, whereas when it is determined that a JUB jackpot is generated, a time-saving jackpot signal is output with a delay. Therefore, even if the player looks at the display on the calling lamp device 500, the player cannot immediately grasp that the JUB jackpot has occurred. In addition, when the small hit is set, the player cannot immediately know that the JUB big hit or the small hit has occurred even when viewing the display on the calling lamp device 500. In addition, when displaying that a jackpot has occurred after the occurrence of a JUB jackpot, the player cannot immediately grasp that the JUB jackpot has occurred even when viewing the display on the calling lamp device 500. Furthermore, if the output timing of the time-saving jackpot signal is later than the display, the player can expect that a JUB jackpot will occur until it is displayed that a JUB jackpot has occurred. Therefore, it is possible to further reduce the possibility that the game taste is lowered.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a jackpot effect that gives a player a gaming value higher than that in the normal state, and subsequently, a probability variation state in which the winning probability of the jackpot lottery is higher than that in the normal state is generated as a JUB jackpot.

  As a result, when the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with a random symbol that is indistinguishable from the missed symbol, and when the jackpot effect and the probability change state subsequently occur, the jackpot signal with a short time is output with a delay. Can be further reduced.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, when it is determined that a JUB jackpot will be generated, the effect symbol display device 91 displays that the jackpot has been generated, and after displaying the occurrence of the jackpot, a short-time jackpot signal is output.

  Accordingly, the player can expect the JUB jackpot to be generated until the jackpot occurrence is displayed, so that the possibility that the game taste is lowered can be further reduced.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, when it is determined that a sudden jackpot will be generated, the production symbol is stopped and displayed with a stochastic symbol that is indistinguishable from the outlier symbol, a sudden jackpot is generated, and an uncertain variable jackpot or a probable jackpot is generated. Sometimes the time-saving jackpot signal is output with a delay from the timing of outputting the time-saving jackpot signal.

  As a result, when it is determined that a non-probable big jackpot or a probable big jackpot will be generated, a short-time jackpot signal will be output, whereas when it is determined that a sudden big jackpot will be generated, a short-time jackpot signal will be output with a delay. Therefore, even if the player looks at the display on the calling lamp device 500, the player cannot immediately grasp that the sudden big hit has occurred. In addition, when the small hit is set, the player cannot immediately know that a sudden big hit or a small hit has occurred even when viewing the display on the calling lamp device 500. In addition, when displaying the transition to the probability change state after the occurrence of a sudden big hit, the player cannot immediately grasp that the big hit has occurred even when viewing the display on the calling lamp device 500. Further, if the output timing of the time-saving jackpot signal is later than that of the display, the player can expect that a sudden jackpot will occur until it is displayed that a sudden jackpot has occurred. Therefore, it is possible to further reduce the possibility that the game taste is lowered.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a probability variation state in which the winning probability of the jackpot lottery is higher than that in the normal state is generated as a sudden jackpot.

  As a result, when the production symbol is stopped and displayed with an inaccurate symbol that is indistinguishable from the missed symbol, and a probability variation state occurs, a jackpot signal with a short time is output with a delay, which further reduces the possibility of the game's taste. Can be reduced.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when it is determined that a sudden jackpot will be generated, a transition to the probability variation state is displayed on the effect symbol display device 91, and after the transition to the probability variation state is displayed, a time-saving jackpot signal is output. To do.

  Thereby, since the player can expect the occurrence of the sudden big hit until the transition to the probability change state is displayed, it is possible to further reduce the possibility that the game taste is lowered.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that a non-probable big jackpot or a probable big jackpot will be generated, a long open round that opens the big winning opening 83a for a predetermined time in one round is executed, and a JUB big win, a sudden big hit or a latent probability If it is determined that a big hit will be generated, a short opening round is performed in which the big winning opening 83a is opened for a time shorter than a predetermined time in one round.

  Thereby, since the opening time of the big prize opening 83a is shorter in the short opening round than in the long opening round, the player immediately knows that a big hit has occurred even when looking at the action of the big winning opening 83a. Can not do it. Therefore, it is possible to provide an unexpectedness as if the player suddenly shifted to a JUB jackpot, a sudden jackpot or a latent jackpot.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that a JUB jackpot or an abrupt jackpot will be generated, a time-saving jackpot signal is output just before the end of the short open round.

  As a result, the player cannot immediately know that a JUB big hit or a sudden big hit has occurred, neither by looking at the display on the calling lamp device 500 nor at the action of the big prize opening 83a. Therefore, it is possible to further reduce the possibility that the game taste is lowered.

  Further, the present embodiment includes a latch circuit that latches the time-saving jackpot signal for the execution period of the main process after the time-saving jackpot signal is output, and outputs the time-saving jackpot signal at the execution period of the main process.

  As a result, since the HIGH level signal is constantly output, it is easy to detect the jackpot signal with a short time in the calling lamp device 500.

  In the present embodiment, the terminal plates 608a and 608b correspond to the terminal portions of the invention 1 or 2, and the coil springs 612a and 612b correspond to the urging means of the invention 2.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. 49 and 50 are diagrams showing a second embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention.

  The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that whether or not the output of the jackpot signal with a short time is controlled by the external output process in step S500. Hereinafter, only different parts from the first embodiment will be described, and overlapping parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the external output process in step S500 will be described.
FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an external output process executed by main controller 162.

  When the external output process is executed in step S500, the process proceeds to step S900 as shown in FIG.

In step S900, it is determined whether or not the jackpot signal data with a short time is set in the command buffer, and when it is determined that the jackpot signal data with a short time is set (YES).
Shifts to step S902.

In step S902, it is determined whether or not it is a JUB jackpot or an abrupt jackpot based on the hit type information, and if it is determined that it is a JUB jackpot or an abrupt jackpot (YES)
Moves to step S904.

In step S904, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 25 [s]) has elapsed since the time-saving jackpot signal data is set in the command buffer, and if it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (YES). Shifts to step S906 to send a short hit jackpot signal to the external terminal board 2
13 and proceeds to step S908.

  In step S908, other output processing for transmitting the command set in the command buffer of the RAM 314 to the payout control device 242, the power and launch control device 243, or the sound lamp control device 143 is executed, and the series of processing ends. To return to the original process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S904 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (NO) and in step S900, it is determined that the time-saving jackpot signal data is not set in the command buffer (NO). The process proceeds to step S908.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S902 that it is not a JUB big hit or a sudden big hit (NO), the process proceeds to step S910, where it is determined whether or not the latent big hit is based on the hit type information. If it is determined that there is (YES), the process proceeds to step S912.

  In step S912, it is determined whether or not it is in the time-saving state. If it is determined that the time-saving state is in effect (YES), the process proceeds to step S914.

In step S914, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 25 [s]) has elapsed since the time-saving jackpot signal data is set in the command buffer. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (YES). Shifts to step S916 to send a time-saving jackpot signal to the external terminal board 2
13 and proceeds to step S908.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S914 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (NO), and if it is determined in step S912 that the time is not short (NO), the process proceeds to step S908.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S910 that it is not a latent big hit (NO), the process proceeds to step S918, a time-saving big hit signal is output from the external terminal board 213, and the process proceeds to step S908.

Next, the special winning opening / closing process of step S508 will be described.
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a special prize opening / closing process executed by the main controller 162.

  When the big prize opening and closing process is executed in step S508, the process proceeds to step S854 as shown in FIG.

In step S854, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit or a small hit based on the hit type information, and if it is determined that a big hit or a small win (YES), step S856
Migrate to

  In step S856, it is determined whether it is time to start the big hit effect or the small hit effect. If it is determined that it is the time to start the big hit effect or the small hit effect (YES), the process proceeds to step S858.

  In step S858, a hit effect start process is executed for storing an opening command corresponding to the non-probable big jackpot, the probable big jackpot, the JUB big jackpot, the sudden big jackpot, the latent big jackpot or the small jackpot in the command buffer. Thereby, in the external output process of step S500, an opening command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 143 via the output port 318.

  When the process of step S858 ends, the process proceeds to step S860, and the time-saving jackpot signal data is stored in the command buffer. Thereby, in the external output processing in step S500, the short jackpot signal with a short time that becomes a HIGH level signal at the timing corresponding to the non-probable big jackpot, the probable big jackpot, the JUB big jackpot, the sudden big jackpot, the latent big jackpot or the small jackpot is output to the external terminal board 213. Is output from.

When the process of step S860 ends, the series of processes ends and the original process is restored.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S856 that it is not the timing to start the big hit effect or the small hit effect (NO), the process proceeds to step S836 to determine whether it is the timing to start the round and start the round. If it is determined that it is time (YES), the process proceeds to step S838 to end a series of processes and return to the original process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S836 that it is not the timing to start the round (NO), the process proceeds to step S840, where it is determined whether the round is continuing, and it is determined that the round is continuing. In the case (YES), the process moves to step S842, the series of processes are terminated, and the original process is restored.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S840 that the round is not continuing (NO), the process proceeds to step S844, where it is determined whether it is time to end the round, and it is determined that it is time to end the round. If yes (YES), the process moves to step S846.

In step S846, “1” is added to the number of rounds, and the process proceeds to step S848 to determine whether the number of rounds exceeds the maximum number of rounds. If it is determined that the maximum number of rounds has been exceeded (YES), In step S850, a series of processing is terminated and the original processing is restored.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S848 that the number of rounds does not exceed the maximum number of rounds (NO), the process proceeds to step S852 to end the series of processes and return to the original process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S844 that it is not the timing to end the round (NO), the series of processes is terminated and the original process is restored.

[Effects] In this way, in this embodiment, when it is determined that a JUB jackpot or an abrupt jackpot will be generated, a jackpot or jackpot after a predetermined time has elapsed since the jackpot signal data with a shortening has been set in the command buffer. Output a signal. Also, if it is determined that a latent big hit is generated, the shorted jackpot signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed since the time-limited jackpot signal data is set in the command buffer only in the time-saving state. Also, when it is determined that a non-probable big jackpot or a probable big jackpot is to be generated, the short jackpot signal is output as soon as the short jackpot signal data is set in the command buffer.

  As a result, in the big winning opening and closing process, the jackpot signal data with a short time is obtained at the timing of starting the big hit effect or the small hit effect regardless of the non-probable big hit, the probable big hit, the JUB big hit, the sudden big hit, the latent big hit or the small hit. Since it only needs to be stored in the command buffer, the big prize opening / closing process is simplified.

[Third Embodiment]
Next, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 51 to FIG. 56 are diagrams showing a third embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention.

  This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that two wirings 606ca and 606cb can be inserted by one push operation unit 624c. Hereinafter, only different parts from the first embodiment will be described, and overlapping parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the configuration of the connection terminal device 600 will be described.
51 is a plan view of the connection terminal device 600. FIG.

FIG. 52 is a perspective view of the connection terminal device 600.
51 and 52, the connection terminal device 600 includes a base body 602, five wiring connection portions 604c formed on the base body 602, and five wiring connection portions 604d formed on the base body 602. It is configured.

  The wiring connection portions 604c and 604d are repeatedly arranged in the order of the wiring connection portions 604c, 604d, 604d, and 604c from the right side surface 602c of the base 602 toward the left side surface 602d. Further, the adjacent wiring connection portions 604c and 604d are arranged in the longitudinal direction (front-rear direction) opposite to each other. Note that the adjacent wiring connection portions 604c and 604d are the wiring connection portion 604c or the wiring connection portion 604d located immediately beside the reference wiring connection portion 604c (the immediate right adjacent or the immediate left adjacent), or the reference wiring connection. The wiring connection part 604c or the wiring connection part 604d located right next to the part 604d (immediately right adjacent or immediately adjacent left).

  Output terminals To1a and To1b are provided in the leftmost wiring connection portion 604c. Similarly, the other wiring connection portion 604c is provided with output terminals To4a and To4b, output terminals To5a and To5b, output terminals To8a and To8b, and output terminals To9a and To9b in this order from the left side.

  Output terminals To2a and To2b are provided in the leftmost wiring connection portion 604d. Similarly, output terminals To3a and To3b, output terminals To6a and To6b, output terminals To7a and To7b, and output terminals To10a and To10b are provided in order from the left side in the other wiring connection portion 604d.

The adjacent wiring connection portions 604c and 604d are colored in different colors. As a result, the adjacent wiring connection portions 604c and 604d can be easily distinguished from each other, so that the possibility of erroneous connection of wirings can be reduced. Further, the wiring connection portions 604c and 604d are colored in different colors in other combinations in the adjacent direction. For example, in order from the left end, purple, yellow, brown, red, gray, green, black, blue, orange, and pink are colored. Thereby, since it becomes easy to distinguish each wiring connection part 604c, 604d, possibility that a wiring will be mistakenly connected can further be reduced.

Next, the configuration of the wiring connection portion 604c will be described.
53 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE ′ in FIG.

  FIG. 54 is a cross-sectional view taken along line E-E ′ in FIG. 51, showing a state where the push operation unit 624 c is pushed.

  As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the wiring connection portion 604c includes a terminal plate 608ca that is electrically connected to the wiring 606ca, a terminal plate 608cb that is electrically connected to the wiring 606cb, and a wiring 606ca and a terminal plate 608ca. And a swing operation member 610c for operating the electrical connection between the wiring 606cb and the terminal plate 608cb, and a coil spring 612c for biasing the swing operation member 610c toward the terminal plates 608ca and 608cb. It is configured.

  The base 602 is formed into a hollow block shape. That is, the adjacent wiring connection portion 604d is partitioned by the partition wall.

  An opening 614 ca into which the wiring 606 ca is inserted and an opening 614 cb into which the wiring 606 cb is inserted are formed on the upper surface 602 e of the base 602. The base body 602 has a notch hole 616c for projecting a part of the swing operation member 610c forward of the base body 602 from the upper surface 602e to the front surface 602b. On the other hand, on the lower surface 602f of the base body 602, a slit hole 618ca for projecting one end portion of the terminal plate 608ca below the base body 602, and a slit hole 618cb for projecting one end portion of the terminal plate 608cb below the base body 602. And a locking pin 620c for locking the coil spring 612c is provided inward.

  A pair of swing bearing recesses (not shown) for swinging the swing operation member 610c is formed on the inner walls of the base 602 on the left and right side surfaces 602c and 602d (FIG. 51).

  The terminal plate 608ca is formed by punching a conductive metal plate, for example. The terminal plate 608ca extends from the upper surface 602e to the lower surface 602f of the base body 602 in parallel with the direction in which the wiring 606ca is inserted, and is fixed to the central inner wall of the base body 602. Further, one end of the terminal plate 608ca protrudes below the base 602 through the slit hole 618ca to constitute an output terminal To8a.

  The terminal plate 608cb is formed by punching a conductive metal plate, for example. The terminal plate 608 cb extends from the upper surface 602 e to the lower surface 602 f of the base 602 in parallel with the direction in which the wiring 606 cb is inserted, and is fixed to the rear inner wall of the base 602. Further, one end of the terminal plate 608cb protrudes below the base body 602 through the slit hole 618cb to constitute an output terminal To8b.

  The swing operation member 610c is made of, for example, a synthetic resin. The swing operation member 610c has a swing support shaft 622c formed at one end thereof, and the swing support shaft 622c is supported by the base 602 so as to be swingable by being supported by a swing bearing recess (not shown). ing. The other end portion of the swing operation member 610c protrudes forward from the notch hole 616c to constitute a push operation portion 624c.

A claw 626c that protrudes upward is formed at the upper end of the push operation portion 624c. Accordingly, it is only necessary to put the finger on the nail 626c and push the pushing operation unit 624c, and the pushing operation unit 624c can be easily operated.

  A pressing portion 628ca that makes the wiring 606ca contact the terminal plate 608ca is formed between the both end portions of the swing operation member 610c and facing the terminal plate 608ca. In addition, a valley portion 630ca that is recessed inward is formed below the pressing portion 628ca. Accordingly, when the swing operation member 610c is swung downward, a space is formed between the pressing portion 628ca and the terminal plate 608ca, so that the wiring 606ca can be easily inserted.

  A pressing portion 628cb for contacting the wiring 606cb with the terminal plate 608cb is formed on the side surface between both end portions of the swing operation member 610c and facing the terminal plate 608cb. In addition, a valley portion 630cb recessed inward is formed below the pressing portion 628cb. Accordingly, when the swing operation member 610c is swung downward, a space is formed between the pressing portion 628cb and the terminal plate 608cb, so that the wiring 606cb can be easily inserted.

  On the other hand, between the both ends of the swing operation member 610c and on the side surface facing the front surface 602b of the base 602, a locking projection 632c that locks the coil spring 612c, and a regulation portion 634c that regulates the expansion and contraction direction of the coil spring 612c. And are formed.

  The coil spring 612c is disposed between the swing operation member 610c and the inner wall of the lower surface 602f of the base body 602. One end of the coil spring 612c is locked to the locking pin 620c, and the other end of the coil spring 612c is locked to the locking projection 632c. The swing operation member 610c is urged by the coil spring 612c in a direction in which the pressing portions 628ca and 628cb come into contact with the terminal plates 608ca and 608cb. The coil spring 612c can appropriately bias the swing operation member 610c toward the terminal plates 608ca and 608cb by restricting the expansion / contraction operation thereof by the restriction portion 634c. The coil spring 612c may be replaced with, for example, a leaf spring as long as it has compression elasticity.

  In the state where the swing operation member 610c is biased by the coil spring 612c, as shown in FIG. 53, the opening 614ca is closed by the pressing portion 628ca, the opening 614cb is closed by the pressing portion 628cb, and the wirings 606ca and 606cb are respectively closed. It cannot be inserted.

Next, an operation of connecting the wirings 606ca and 606cb to the wiring connection portion 604c will be described.
When connecting the wirings 606ca and 606cb to the wiring connection part 604c, as shown in FIG. 54, first, a finger is put on the claw 626c and the pushing operation part 624c is pushed downward. As a result, the swing operation member 610c swings downward against the elastic force of the coil spring 612c, and the pressing portion 628ca closing the opening 614ca and the pressing portion 628cb closing the opening 614cb respectively. Moving forward, the openings 614ca and 614cb are opened. Further, the swinging operation member 610c swings to form a space between the pressing portion 628ca and the terminal plate 608ca and between the pressing portion 628cb and the terminal plate 608cb.

  Then, when the wiring 606ca is inserted from the opening 614ca and the wiring 606cb is inserted from the opening 614cb, and the drag to the coil spring 612c is released, the swing operation member 610c is caused by the elastic force of the coil spring 612c as shown in FIG. Oscillating upward, the pressing portions 628ca and 628cb move toward the terminal plates 608ca and 608cb. The inserted wiring 606ca is pressed by the pressing portion 628ca so as to be in contact with the terminal plate 608ca. Similarly, the inserted wiring 606cb is pressed by the pressing portion 628cb so as to contact the terminal plate 608cb. Accordingly, the wiring 606ca and the terminal plate 608ca are electrically connected to each other, and the wiring 606cb and the terminal plate 608cb are electrically connected to each other.

Next, the configuration of the wiring connection portion 604d will be described.
55 is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF ′ in FIG.

  FIG. 56 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line F-F ′ in FIG. 51, showing a state where the push operation unit 624 d is pushed.

  As shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, the wiring connection portion 604d includes a terminal plate 608da that is electrically connected to the wiring 606da, a terminal plate 608db that is electrically connected to the wiring 606db, and a wiring 606da and a terminal plate 608da. And a swing operation member 610d for operating the electrical connection between the wiring 606db and the terminal plate 608db, and a coil spring 612d for biasing the swing operation member 610d toward the terminal plates 608da and 608db. It is configured.

  An opening 614da into which the wiring 606da is inserted and an opening 614db into which the wiring 606db is inserted are formed on the upper surface 602e of the base 602. The base body 602 has a notch hole 616d for projecting a part of the swing operation member 610d to the rear of the base body 602 from the upper surface 602e to the back surface 602a. On the other hand, on the lower surface 602f of the base 602, a slit hole 618da for projecting one end of the terminal plate 608da below the base 602 and a slit 618db for projecting one end of the terminal plate 608db below the base 602. And a locking pin 620d for locking the coil spring 612d is provided inward.

  A pair of swing bearing recesses (not shown) for swinging the swing operation member 610d is formed on the inner walls of the base 602 on the left and right side surfaces 602c and 602d (FIG. 51).

  The terminal plate 608da is formed by punching a conductive metal plate, for example. The terminal plate 608da extends from the upper surface 602e to the lower surface 602f of the base body 602 in parallel with the direction in which the wiring 606da is inserted, and is fixed to the central inner wall of the base body 602. Also, one end of the terminal plate 608da protrudes below the base body 602 through the slit hole 618da to constitute an output terminal To7b.

  The terminal plate 608db is formed by punching a conductive metal plate, for example. The terminal plate 608db extends from the upper surface 602e to the lower surface 602f of the base 602 in parallel with the direction in which the wiring 606db is inserted, and is fixed to the front inner wall of the base 602. Also, one end of the terminal plate 608db protrudes below the base 602 through the slit hole 618db to constitute the output terminal To7a.

  The swing operation member 610d is made of, for example, a synthetic resin. The swing operation member 610d has a swing support shaft 622d formed at one end thereof, and the swing support shaft 622d is supported by the base 602 so as to be swingable by being supported by a swing bearing recess (not shown). ing. The other end portion of the swing operation member 610d protrudes rearward from the notch hole 616d, and constitutes a push operation portion 624d.

  The height of the push operation unit 624d is set higher than that of the push operation unit 624c. As a result, even if the overall width of the connection terminal device 600 is reduced, the possibility that the adjacent push operation unit 624c is accidentally pushed simultaneously can be reduced, so that the wirings 606da and 606db can be easily connected. .

The length in the direction (front-rear direction) toward the tip of the push operation unit 624d is set shorter than the push operation unit 624c. Thereby, even if the overall width of the connection terminal device 600 is reduced,
Since it is possible to reduce the possibility that the adjacent pressing operation unit 624c is erroneously pressed at the same time, it becomes easier to connect the wirings 606da and 606db.

  A claw 626d that protrudes upward is formed at the top end of the push operation portion 624d. Accordingly, it is only necessary to put the finger on the nail 626d and push the push operation unit 624d, and the push operation unit 624d can be easily operated.

  Further, the height of the claw 626d is set higher than that of the claw 626c. As a result, it is difficult to put a finger on the push operation portion 624d having a short length in the front-rear direction. However, since the height of the nail 626d is higher than that of the nail 626c, the finger can be easily placed on the nail 626d. It becomes easy to operate.

  A pressing portion 628da for bringing the wiring 606da into contact with the terminal plate 608da is formed on the side surface between both end portions of the swing operation member 610d and facing the terminal plate 608da. In addition, a valley 630da that is recessed inward is formed below the pressing portion 628da. Accordingly, when the swing operation member 610d is swung downward, a space is formed between the pressing portion 628da and the terminal plate 608da, so that the wiring 606da can be easily inserted.

  A pressing portion 628db for bringing the wiring 606db into contact with the terminal plate 608db is formed on the side surface between both end portions of the swing operation member 610d and facing the terminal plate 608db. In addition, a valley portion 630db recessed inward is formed below the pressing portion 628db. Thus, when the swing operation member 610d is swung downward, a space is formed between the pressing portion 628db and the terminal plate 608db, so that the wiring 606db can be easily inserted.

  On the other hand, between the both ends of the swing operation member 610d and on the side surface facing the back surface 602a of the base body 602, a locking projection 632d that locks the coil spring 612d and a regulation portion 634d that regulates the expansion and contraction direction of the coil spring 612d. And are formed.

  The coil spring 612d is disposed between the swing operation member 610d and the inner wall of the lower surface 602f of the base body 602. One end portion of the coil spring 612d is locked to the locking pin 620d, and the other end portion of the coil spring 612d is locked to the locking convex portion 632d. The swinging operation member 610d is biased by the coil spring 612d in a direction in which the pressing portions 628da and 628db contact the terminal plates 608da and 608db. The expansion / contraction operation of the coil spring 612d is restricted by the restricting portion 634d, so that the swing operation member 610d can be appropriately biased toward the terminal plates 608da and 608db. The coil spring 612d may be replaced with, for example, a leaf spring as long as it has compression elasticity.

  In a state where the swing operation member 610d is biased by the coil spring 612d, as shown in FIG. 55, the opening 614da is closed by the pressing portion 628da, the opening 614db is closed by the pressing portion 628db, and the wirings 606da and 606db are closed. It cannot be inserted.

Next, an operation of connecting the wirings 606da and 606db to the wiring connection portion 604d will be described.
When connecting the wirings 606da and 606db to the wiring connecting portion 604d, first, as shown in FIG. 56, the finger is put on the claw 626d and the pushing operation portion 624d is pushed downward. As a result, the swing operation member 610d swings downward against the elastic force of the coil spring 612d, and the pressing portion 628da closing the opening 614da and the pressing portion 628db closing the opening 614db, respectively. It moves rearward and the openings 614da and 614db are opened. Further, the swinging operation member 610d swings to form a space between the pressing portion 628da and the terminal plate 608da and between the pressing portion 628db and the terminal plate 608db.

  Then, when the wiring 606da is inserted from the opening 614da and the wiring 606db is inserted from the opening 614db, and the drag to the coil spring 612d is released, the swing operation member 610d is moved by the elastic force of the coil spring 612d as shown in FIG. Oscillating upward, the pressing portions 628da and 628db move toward the terminal plates 608da and 608db. The inserted wiring 606da is pressed by the pressing portion 628da so as to be in contact with the terminal plate 608da. Similarly, the inserted wiring 606db is pressed by the pressing portion 628db so as to be in contact with the terminal plate 608db. Accordingly, the wiring 606da and the terminal plate 608da are electrically connected to each other, and the wiring 606db and the terminal plate 608db are electrically connected to each other.

  [Effect] Thus, in this embodiment, the wiring connection portion 604c is electrically connected to the opening 614ca into which the wiring 606ca is inserted, the opening 614cb into which the wiring 606cb is inserted, and the wiring 606ca. Terminal portion 608ca, terminal portion 608cb electrically connected to wiring 606cb, and one end portion swingably supported by base 602, and push operation portion 624c is formed at the other end portion, from opening 614ca A pressing portion 628ca that presses the inserted wiring 606ca against the terminal portion 608ca, and a swing operation member 610c formed with a pressing portion 628cb that presses the wiring 606cb inserted from the opening 614cb against the terminal portion 608cb. The portion 604c is connected to another wiring so that the extending directions of the push operation portions 624c and 624d are reversed. Parts 604c, is positioned adjacent to 604d.

  Thereby, even if the overall width of the connection terminal device 600 is reduced, the possibility that the pushing operation portions 624c and 624d of the adjacent wiring connection portions 604c and 604d are simultaneously pushed in by mistake can be reduced. As compared with the case, the wirings 606da and 606db can be easily connected.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the height of the push operation unit 624d is set higher than that of the push operation unit 624c.

  As a result, even if the overall width of the connection terminal device 600 is reduced, the possibility that the adjacent pushing operation unit 624c is pushed in at the same time can be reduced, so that the wirings 606da and 606db can be more easily connected. Become.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the length in the front-rear direction of the push operation unit 624d is set shorter than that of the push operation unit 624c.

  As a result, even if the overall width of the connection terminal device 600 is reduced, the possibility that the adjacent pushing operation unit 624c is pushed in at the same time can be reduced, so that the wirings 606da and 606db can be more easily connected. Become.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a coil spring 612c that biases the swing operation member 610c toward the terminal plates 608ca and 608cb is provided.

  Accordingly, the wirings 606ca and 606cb are sandwiched between the pressing portion 628ca and the terminal plate 608ca and between the pressing portion 628cb and the terminal plate 608cb by the elastic force of the coil spring 612c, and thus the wirings 606ca and 606cb and the terminal plate 608ca , 608cb can be more reliably connected. The same effect can be obtained for the wiring connection portion 604d.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a restricting portion 634 that restricts the expansion / contraction direction of the coil spring 612c is provided on the side surface between both end portions of the swing operation member 610c and facing the front surface 602b of the base 602.
c is formed.

  Thereby, since the expansion / contraction operation of the coil spring 612c is restricted by the restricting portion 634c, the swing operation member 610c can be appropriately biased toward the terminal plates 608ca and 608cb. The same effect can be obtained for the wiring connection portion 604d.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the swing operation member 610c is formed with a valley portion 630ca that is recessed inwardly below the pressing portion 628ca.

  Accordingly, when the swing operation member 610c is swung downward, a space is formed between the pressing portion 628ca and the terminal plate 608ca, so that the wiring 606ca can be easily inserted. The same effect can be obtained for the wiring connection portion 604d.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the swing operation member 610c has a valley portion 630cb that is recessed inwardly below the pressing portion 628cb.

  Accordingly, when the swing operation member 610c is swung downward, a space is formed between the pressing portion 628cb and the terminal plate 608cb, so that the wiring 606cb can be easily inserted. The same effect can be obtained for the wiring connection portion 604d.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a claw 626c protruding upward is formed at the upper end of the push operation portion 624c.

  Accordingly, it is only necessary to put the finger on the nail 626c and push the pushing operation unit 624c, and the pushing operation unit 624c can be easily operated. The same effect can be obtained for the wiring connection portion 604d.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the height of the claw 626d is set higher than that of the claw 626c.

  As a result, it is difficult to put a finger on the push operation portion 624d having a short length in the front-rear direction. However, since the height of the nail 626d is higher than that of the nail 626c, the finger can be easily placed on the nail 626d. It becomes easy to operate.

  Further, in the present embodiment, adjacent wiring connection portions 604c and 604d are colored in different colors.

  As a result, the adjacent wiring connection portions 604c and 604d can be easily distinguished, so that the possibility of erroneous connection of the wirings 606ca, 606cb, 606da, and 606db can be reduced.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the wiring connection portions 604c and 604d are colored in different colors in other combinations in the adjacent direction.

  Thereby, since it becomes easy to distinguish each wiring connection part 604c, 604d, possibility that the wiring 606ca, 606cb, 606da, 606db will be connected accidentally can further be reduced.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Next, a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. 57 to 61
These are figures which show 4th Embodiment of the game machine which concerns on this invention.

  This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that two wirings 606ea and 606eb can be inserted by one push operation unit 624e. Hereinafter, only different parts from the first embodiment will be described, and overlapping parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the configuration of the connection terminal device 600 will be described.
FIG. 57 is a plan view of connection terminal device 600.

  As shown in FIG. 57, the connection terminal device 600 includes a base 602, five wiring connection portions 604e formed on the base 602, and five wiring connection portions 604f formed on the base 602. It is configured.

  The wiring connection portions 604e and 604f are repeatedly arranged in the order of the wiring connection portions 604e, 604f, 604f, and 604e from the right side surface 602c of the base 602 toward the left side surface 602d. Further, the adjacent wiring connection portions 604e and 604f are arranged in the longitudinal direction (front-rear direction) opposite to each other. Note that the adjacent wiring connection portions 604e and 604f are the wiring connection portion 604e or the wiring connection portion 604f located immediately beside the nearest wiring connection portion 604e (immediately right adjacent or immediately adjacent left), or the reference wiring connection. The wiring connection part 604e or the wiring connection part 604f located right next to the part 604f (nearest right adjacent or nearest left adjacent).

  Output terminals To1a and To1b are provided in the leftmost wiring connection portion 604e. Similarly, the other wiring connection portion 604e is provided with output terminals To4a and To4b, output terminals To5a and To5b, output terminals To8a and To8b, and output terminals To9a and To9b in this order from the left side.

  Output terminals To2a and To2b are provided in the leftmost wiring connection portion 604f. Similarly, output terminals To3a and To3b, output terminals To6a and To6b, output terminals To7a and To7b, and output terminals To10a and To10b are provided in the other wiring connection portion 604f in this order from the left side.

  The adjacent wiring connection portions 604e and 604f are colored in different colors. As a result, the adjacent wiring connection portions 604e and 604f can be easily distinguished from each other, so that the possibility of erroneous connection of wirings can be reduced. Further, the wiring connection portions 604e and 604f are colored in different colors in other combinations in the adjacent direction. For example, in order from the left end, purple, yellow, brown, red, gray, green, black, blue, orange, and pink are colored. Thereby, since it becomes easy to distinguish each wiring connection part 604e and 604f, possibility that a wiring will be connected accidentally can further be reduced.

Next, the configuration of the wiring connection portion 604e will be described.
58 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line GG ′ in FIG.

  FIG. 59 is a cross-sectional view taken along line G-G ′ in FIG. 57, showing a state where the push operation unit 624 e is pushed.

As shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, the wiring connection portion 604e includes a terminal plate 608ea that is electrically connected to the wiring 606ea, a terminal plate 608eb that is electrically connected to the wiring 606eb, and a wiring 606ea and a terminal plate 608ea. Oscillating operation member 610ea for operating the electrical connection with, and oscillating operation member 610 for operating the electrical connection between the wiring 606eb and the terminal plate 608eb.
eb and a coil spring 612e that biases the swing operation member 610ea toward the terminal plate 608ea.

  The base 602 is formed into a hollow block shape. That is, the adjacent wiring connection portion 604f is partitioned by the partition wall.

  An opening 614ea into which the wiring 606ea is inserted and an opening 614eb into which the wiring 606eb is inserted are formed on the upper surface 602e of the base 602. Further, the base 602 is provided with a notch 616e for projecting a part of the swing operation member 610ea forward of the base 602 from the upper surface 602e to the front surface 602b. On the other hand, on the lower surface 602f of the base 602, a slit hole 618ea for projecting one end of the terminal plate 608ea below the base 602, and a slit 618eb for projecting one end of the terminal plate 608eb below the base 602. And a locking pin 620e for locking the coil spring 612e is provided inward.

  Also, a set of swing bearing recesses (not shown) for swinging the swing operation member 610ea and a swing operation member 610eb are provided on the inner walls of the base 602 on the left and right side surfaces 602c and 602d (FIG. 57). A set of rocking bearing recesses (not shown) for rocking is formed.

  The terminal plate 608ea is formed by punching a conductive metal plate, for example. The terminal plate 608ea extends from the upper surface 602e to the lower surface 602f of the base 602 in parallel with the direction in which the wiring 606ea is inserted, and is fixed to the inner wall at the center front portion of the base 602. Also, one end of the terminal plate 608ea protrudes below the base 602 through the slit hole 618ea, and constitutes an output terminal To8a.

  The terminal plate 608eb is formed by punching a conductive metal plate, for example. The terminal plate 608eb extends from the upper surface 602e to the lower surface 602f of the base body 602 in parallel with the direction in which the wiring 606eb is inserted, and is fixed to the central rear inner wall of the base body 602. Further, one end of the terminal plate 608eb protrudes below the base 602 through the slit hole 618eb, and constitutes an output terminal To8b.

  The swing operation member 610ea is made of, for example, a synthetic resin. The swing operation member 610ea has a swing support shaft 622ea formed at one end thereof, and the swing support shaft 622ea is supported by the base 602 so as to be swingable by being supported by a swing bearing recess (not shown). ing. A gear 636ea is fitted to the swing support shaft 622ea. The other end portion of the swing operation member 610ea protrudes forward from the notch hole 616e to constitute a push operation portion 624e.

  The swing operation member 610eb is made of, for example, a synthetic resin. The swing operation member 610eb has a swing support shaft 622eb formed at one end thereof, and the swing support shaft 622eb is supported by the base body 602 so as to be swingable by being supported by a swing bearing recess (not shown). ing. A gear 636eb is fitted to the swing support shaft 622eb. The gear 636eb meshes with the gear 636ea. Therefore, when the swing operation member 610ea is swung downward, the rotational force about the swing support shaft 622ea is transmitted to the swing operation member 610eb via the gears 636ea and 636eb. The moving operation member 610eb also swings downward. Similarly, when the swing operation member 610ea swings upward, the swing operation member 610eb swings upward accordingly.

A claw 626e that protrudes upward is formed at the upper end of the push operation portion 624e. Accordingly, it is only necessary to put the finger on the nail 626e and push the push operation unit 624e, and the push operation unit 624e can be easily operated.

  A pressing portion 628ea that makes the wiring 606ea contact the terminal plate 608ea is formed on the side surface between both end portions of the swing operation member 610ea and facing the terminal plate 608ea. In addition, a valley portion 630ea that is recessed inward is formed between the pressing portion 628ea and the swing support shaft 622ea. Accordingly, when the swing operation member 610ea is swung downward, a space is formed between the pressing portion 628ea and the terminal plate 608ea, so that the wiring 606ea can be easily inserted.

  A pressing portion 628eb that makes the wiring 606eb contact the terminal plate 608eb is formed on the side surface between both ends of the swing operation member 610eb and facing the terminal plate 608eb. In addition, a valley portion 630eb recessed inward is formed between the pressing portion 628eb and the swing support shaft 622eb. Accordingly, when the swing operation member 610eb is swung downward, a space is formed between the pressing portion 628eb and the terminal plate 608eb, so that the wiring 606eb can be easily inserted.

  On the other hand, between the both ends of the swing operation member 610ea and on the side surface facing the front surface 602b of the base body 602, a locking projection 632e that locks the coil spring 612e and a regulation portion 634e that regulates the expansion and contraction direction of the coil spring 612e. And are formed.

  The coil spring 612e is disposed between the swing operation member 610ea and the inner wall of the lower surface 602f of the base body 602. One end of the coil spring 612e is locked to the locking pin 620e, and the other end of the coil spring 612e is locked to the locking projection 632e. The swing operation member 610ea is biased by the coil spring 612e in a direction in which the pressing portion 628ea contacts the terminal plate 608ea. The expansion / contraction operation of the coil spring 612e is restricted by the restricting portion 634e, so that the swing operation member 610ea can be appropriately biased toward the terminal plate 608ea. The coil spring 612e may be replaced with, for example, a leaf spring as long as it has compression elasticity.

  In a state where the swing operation member 610ea is biased by the coil spring 612e, as shown in FIG. 58, the opening 614ea is closed by the pressing portion 628ea, the opening 614eb is closed by the pressing portion 628eb, and the wirings 606ea and 606eb are respectively closed. It cannot be inserted.

Next, an operation of connecting the wirings 606ea and 606eb to the wiring connection portion 604e will be described.
When connecting the wirings 606ea and 606eb to the wiring connection part 604e, as shown in FIG. 59, first, a finger is put on the claw 626e and the pushing operation part 624e is pushed downward. As a result, the swing operation member 610ea swings downward against the elastic force of the coil spring 612e, the pressing portion 628ea closing the opening 614ea moves forward, and the opening 614ea is opened. Along with this, the swing operation member 610eb swings downward, the pressing portion 628eb closing the opening 614eb moves backward, and the opening 614eb is opened. Further, the swinging operation members 610ea and 610eb swing to form a space between the pressing portion 628ea and the terminal plate 608ea and between the pressing portion 628eb and the terminal plate 608eb.

When the wiring 606ea is inserted from the opening 614ea and the wiring 606eb is inserted from the opening 614eb, and the drag to the coil spring 612e is released, the swing operation member 610ea is caused by the elastic force of the coil spring 612e as shown in FIG. Oscillating upward, the pressing portion 628ea moves to the terminal plate 608ea side. Along with this, the swing operation member 610eb swings upward, and the pressing portion 628eb moves to the terminal plate 608eb side. The inserted wiring 606ea is pressed by the pressing portion 628ea so as to come into contact with the terminal plate 608ea.
Similarly, the inserted wiring 606eb is pressed against the terminal plate 608eb by the pressing portion 628eb. Accordingly, the wiring 606ea and the terminal plate 608ea are electrically connected to each other, and the wiring 606eb and the terminal plate 608eb are electrically connected to each other.

Next, the configuration of the wiring connection portion 604f will be described.
60 is a cross-sectional view along the line HH ′ in FIG.

  61 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line H-H ′ in FIG. 57, showing a state where the push operation unit 624 f is pushed.

  As shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the wiring connection portion 604f includes a terminal plate 608fa that is electrically connected to the wiring 606fa, a terminal plate 608fb that is electrically connected to the wiring 606fb, and the wiring 606fa and the terminal plate 608fa. Oscillating operation member 610fa for operating the electrical connection, oscillating operation member 610fb for operating the electrical connection between the wiring 606fb and the terminal plate 608fb, and the oscillating operation member 610fa are biased toward the terminal plate 608fa. And a coil spring 612f.

  An opening 614fa into which the wiring 606fa is inserted and an opening 614fb into which the wiring 606fb is inserted are formed on the upper surface 602e of the base 602. Further, the base 602 is provided with a notch hole 616f for projecting a part of the swing operation member 610fa to the rear of the base 602 from the top surface 602e to the back surface 602a. On the other hand, on the lower surface 602f of the base 602, a slit hole 618fa for projecting one end of the terminal plate 608fa below the base 602 and a slit hole 618fb for projecting one end of the terminal plate 608fb below the base 602. And a locking pin 620f for locking the coil spring 612f is provided inward.

  Further, a set of swing bearing recesses (not shown) for swinging the swing operation member 610fa and a swing operation member 610fb are provided on the inner walls of the base 602 on the left and right side surfaces 602c and 602d (FIG. 57). A set of rocking bearing recesses (not shown) for rocking is formed.

  The terminal plate 608fa is formed by punching a conductive metal plate, for example. The terminal plate 608fa extends from the upper surface 602e to the lower surface 602f of the base body 602 in parallel with the direction in which the wiring 606fa is inserted, and is fixed to the central rear inner wall of the base body 602. Further, one end of the terminal plate 608fa protrudes below the base body 602 through the slit hole 618fa to constitute an output terminal To7b.

  The terminal plate 608fb is formed by punching a conductive metal plate, for example. The terminal plate 608fb extends from the upper surface 602e to the lower surface 602f of the base 602 in parallel with the direction in which the wiring 606fb is inserted, and is fixed to the inner wall at the center front portion of the base 602. Also, one end of the terminal plate 608fb protrudes below the base 602 through the slit hole 618fb, and constitutes an output terminal To7a.

  The swing operation member 610fa is made of, for example, a synthetic resin. The swing operation member 610fa has a swing support shaft 622fa formed at one end thereof, and the swing support shaft 622fa is supported by the base body 602 so as to be swingable by being supported by a swing bearing recess (not shown). ing. A gear 636fa is fitted to the swing support shaft 622fa. The other end portion of the swing operation member 610fa protrudes rearward from the notch hole 616f to constitute a push operation portion 624f.

The swing operation member 610fb is made of, for example, a synthetic resin. The swing operation member 610fb has a swing support shaft 622fb formed at one end thereof, and the swing support shaft 622fb is supported in a swing bearing recess (not shown) so as to be swingably supported by the base 602. ing. A gear 636fb is fitted to the swing support shaft 622fb. The gear 636fb meshes with the gear 636fa. Therefore, when the swing operation member 610fa is swung downward, the rotational force about the swing support shaft 622fa is transmitted to the swing operation member 610fb via the gears 636fa and 636fb. The moving operation member 610fb also swings downward. Similarly, when the swing operation member 610fa is swung upward, the swing operation member 610fb is swung upward accordingly.

  The height of the push operation unit 624f is set higher than that of the push operation unit 624e. As a result, even if the overall width of the connection terminal device 600 is reduced, the possibility that the adjacent push-in operation unit 624e is pushed in at the same time can be reduced, so that the wirings 606fa and 606fb can be easily connected. .

  The length in the direction (front-rear direction) toward the tip of the push operation unit 624f is set to be shorter than that of the push operation unit 624e. As a result, even if the overall width of the connection terminal device 600 is reduced, the possibility that the adjacent push operation unit 624e is pushed in at the same time can be reduced, so that the wirings 606fa and 606fb can be more easily connected. Become.

  A claw 626f that protrudes upward is formed at the top end of the push operation portion 624f. Accordingly, it is only necessary to put the finger on the nail 626f and push the push operation unit 624f, so that the push operation unit 624f is easily operated.

  Further, the height of the claw 626f is set higher than that of the claw 626e. As a result, it is difficult to put a finger on the push operation portion 624f having a short length in the front-rear direction. However, since the height of the nail 626f is higher than that of the nail 626e, the finger can be easily placed on the nail 626f. It becomes easy to operate.

  A pressing portion 628fa that makes the wiring 606fa contact the terminal plate 608fa is formed on the side surface between both ends of the swing operation member 610fa and facing the terminal plate 608fa. In addition, a valley portion 630fa that is recessed inward is formed between the pressing portion 628fa and the swing support shaft 622fa. Accordingly, when the swing operation member 610fa is swung downward, a space is formed between the pressing portion 628fa and the terminal plate 608fa, so that the wiring 606fa can be easily inserted.

  A pressing portion 628fb that makes the wiring 606fb contact the terminal plate 608fb is formed on the side surface between the both ends of the swing operation member 610fb and facing the terminal plate 608fb. Further, a valley portion 630fb recessed inward is formed between the pressing portion 628fb and the swing support shaft 622fb. Thereby, when the swing operation member 610fb is swung downward, a space is formed between the pressing portion 628fb and the terminal plate 608fb, so that the wiring 606fb can be easily inserted.

  On the other hand, between the both ends of the swing operation member 610fa and on the side surface facing the back surface 602a of the base body 602, a locking projection 632f that locks the coil spring 612f and a regulation portion 634f that regulates the expansion and contraction direction of the coil spring 612f. And are formed.

The coil spring 612f is disposed between the swing operation member 610fa and the inner wall of the lower surface 602f of the base body 602. One end of the coil spring 612f is locked to the locking pin 620f, and the other end of the coil spring 612f is locked to the locking projection 632f. The swing operation member 610fa is biased by the coil spring 612f in a direction in which the pressing portion 628fa contacts the terminal plate 608fa. The coil spring 612f can appropriately bias the swing operation member 610fa toward the terminal plate 608fa by restricting the expansion / contraction operation thereof by the restriction portion 634f. The coil spring 612f may be replaced with, for example, a leaf spring as long as it has compression elasticity.

  In a state where the swing operation member 610fa is biased by the coil spring 612f, as shown in FIG. 60, the opening 614fa is closed by the pressing portion 628fa, the opening 614fb is closed by the pressing portion 628fb, and the wirings 606fa and 606fb are respectively closed. It cannot be inserted.

Next, an operation of connecting the wirings 606fa and 606fb to the wiring connection portion 604f will be described.
When connecting the wirings 606fa and 606fb to the wiring connection part 604f, as shown in FIG. 61, first, a finger is put on the claw 626f and the push operation part 624f is pushed downward. As a result, the swing operation member 610fa swings downward against the elastic force of the coil spring 612f, the pressing portion 628fa closing the opening 614fa moves rearward, and the opening 614fa is opened. Along with this, the swing operation member 610fb swings downward, the pressing portion 628fb closing the opening 614fb moves forward, and the opening 614fb is opened. Further, the swinging operation members 610fa and 610fb swing to form a space between the pressing portion 628fa and the terminal plate 608fa and between the pressing portion 628fb and the terminal plate 608fb.

  When the wiring 606fa is inserted from the opening 614fa and the wiring 606fb is inserted from the opening 614fb, and the drag to the coil spring 612f is released, the swing operation member 610fa is caused by the elastic force of the coil spring 612f as shown in FIG. Oscillating upward, the pressing portion 628fa moves to the terminal plate 608fa side. Along with this, the swing operation member 610fb swings upward, and the pressing portion 628fb moves to the terminal plate 608fb side. The inserted wiring 606fa is pressed by the pressing portion 628fa so as to contact the terminal plate 608fa. Similarly, the inserted wiring 606fb is pressed by the pressing portion 628fb so as to contact the terminal plate 608fb. Thereby, the wiring 606fa and the terminal plate 608fa are electrically connected to each other, and the wiring 606fb and the terminal plate 608fb are electrically connected to each other.

  [Effects] Thus, in this embodiment, the wiring connection portion 604e is electrically connected to the opening 614ea into which the wiring 606ea is inserted, the opening 614eb into which the wiring 606eb is inserted, and the wiring 606ea. Terminal portion 608ea, terminal portion 608eb electrically connected to wiring 606eb, one end portion is swingably supported by base 602, and push operation portion 624e is formed at the other end portion from opening 614ea. A pressing portion 628ea for pressing the inserted wiring 606ea against the terminal portion 608ea is formed, a swing operation member 610ea having a gear 636ea attached to the swing shaft, and one end portion of the base member 602 are swingably supported. A pressing portion 628eb is formed to press the wiring 606eb inserted from the opening 614eb against the terminal portion 608eb. A swing operation member 610eb having a gear 636eb attached to the shaft and meshing with the gear 636ea is provided, and the wiring connection portion 604e has another wiring connection portion 604e so that the extending directions of the push operation portions 624e and 624f are reversed. , 604f.

  As a result, even if the overall width of the connection terminal device 600 is reduced, the possibility that the pushing operation portions 624e and 624f of the adjacent wiring connection portions 604e and 604f are accidentally pushed simultaneously can be reduced. As compared with the case, the wirings 606fa and 606fb can be easily connected.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the height of the push operation unit 624f is set higher than that of the push operation unit 624e.

  As a result, even if the overall width of the connection terminal device 600 is reduced, the possibility that the adjacent push operation unit 624e is pushed in at the same time can be reduced, so that the wirings 606fa and 606fb can be more easily connected. Become.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the length in the front-rear direction of the push operation unit 624f is set shorter than that of the push operation unit 624e.

  As a result, even if the overall width of the connection terminal device 600 is reduced, the possibility that the adjacent push operation unit 624e is pushed in at the same time can be reduced, so that the wirings 606fa and 606fb can be more easily connected. Become.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a coil spring 612e that biases the swing operation member 610ea toward the terminal plate 608ea is provided.

  Accordingly, the wirings 606ea and 606eb are sandwiched between the pressing portion 628ea and the terminal plate 608ea and between the pressing portion 628eb and the terminal plate 608eb by the elastic force of the coil spring 612e, and thus the wirings 606ea and 606eb and the terminal plate 608ea , 608eb can be more reliably connected. The same effect can be obtained for the wiring connection portion 604f.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a restricting portion 634e for restricting the expansion / contraction direction of the coil spring 612e is formed on the side surface between both end portions of the swing operation member 610ea and facing the front surface 602b of the base body 602.

  Thereby, since the expansion / contraction operation of the coil spring 612e is restricted by the restricting portion 634e, the swing operation member 610ea can be appropriately biased toward the terminal plate 608ea. The same effect can be obtained for the wiring connection portion 604f.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the swing operation member 610ea has a valley 630ea that is recessed inwardly between the pressing portion 628ea and the swing support shaft 622ea.

  Accordingly, when the swing operation member 610ea is swung downward, a space is formed between the pressing portion 628ea and the terminal plate 608ea, so that the wiring 606ea can be easily inserted. The same effect can be obtained for the wiring connection portion 604f.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the swing operation member 610eb is formed with a valley 630eb recessed inward between the pressing portion 628eb and the swing support shaft 622eb.

  Accordingly, when the swing operation member 610eb is swung downward, a space is formed between the pressing portion 628eb and the terminal plate 608eb, so that the wiring 606eb can be easily inserted. The same effect can be obtained for the wiring connection portion 604f.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a claw 626e protruding upward is formed at the upper end of the push operation portion 624e.

  Accordingly, it is only necessary to put the finger on the nail 626e and push the push operation unit 624e, and the push operation unit 624e can be easily operated. The same effect can be obtained for the wiring connection portion 604f.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the height of the claw 626f is set higher than that of the claw 626e.

  As a result, it is difficult to put a finger on the push operation portion 624f having a short length in the front-rear direction. However, since the height of the nail 626f is higher than that of the nail 626e, the finger can be easily placed on the nail 626f. It becomes easy to operate.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, adjacent wiring connection portions 604e and 604f are colored in different colors.

  As a result, the adjacent wiring connection portions 604e and 604f can be easily distinguished, so that the possibility of erroneous connection of the wirings 606ea, 606eb, 606fa, and 606fb can be reduced.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the wiring connection portions 604e and 604f are colored in different colors in other combinations in the adjacent direction.

  As a result, the wiring connection portions 604e and 604f can be easily distinguished from each other, so that the possibility of erroneous connection of the wirings 606ea, 606eb, 606fa, and 606fb can be further reduced.

[Other Embodiments]
In the first and second embodiments, the height of the push operation unit 624b is set higher than that of the push operation unit 624a. However, the height of the push operation units 624a and 624b is not limited to this. The same may be sufficient, and the pushing operation part 624a may be set higher. In addition, although two types of heights are set for the push operation units 624a and 624b, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, all the push operation units 624a and 624b may have different heights. That is, three or more types of heights can be set. Further, for example, the trajectory of the push operation units 624a and 624b can be set to have a stepped shape, a wavy shape, a convex shape, a concave shape, and other shapes with respect to the height of the push operation portions 624a and 624b.

  In the first and second embodiments, the length in the front-rear direction of the push operation unit 624b is set to be shorter than that of the push operation unit 624a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the push operation units 624a and 624b The length in the front-rear direction may be the same, or the push operation unit 624a may be set shorter. In addition, although two types of lengths in the front-rear direction are set for the push operation units 624a and 624b, the length is not limited to this, and for example, the lengths in the front-rear direction of all the push operation units 624a and 624b may be different. That is, three or more types of lengths in the front-rear direction can be set. Further, for example, the trajectory of the push operation units 624a and 624b can be set to have a stepped shape, a wave shape, a convex shape, a concave shape, and other shapes with respect to the length in the front-rear direction of the push operation portions 624a and 624b.

In the first and second embodiments, the swing operation members 610a and 612b are urged toward the terminal plates 608a and 608b by the coil springs 612a and 612b. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The swing operation members 610a and 610b can be urged toward the terminal plates 608a and 608b by a spring, urethane rubber, silicon rubber or other rubber or sponge. Further, the center of gravity of the swing operation members 610a and 610b may be set so that the pressing portions 628a and 628b are in contact with the terminal plates 608a and 608b by the weight of the swing operation members 610a and 610b without using the coil springs 612a and 612b. it can. In this case, if the member on the side inclined to the terminal plates 608a and 608b of the swing operation members 610a and 610b is formed of a heavy member such as metal, the pressing portions 628a and 628b are surely brought into contact with the terminal plates 608a and 608b. be able to. As a result, the wiring 606a is sandwiched between the pressing portion 628a and the terminal plate 608a by the weight of the swing operation members 610a and 610b, so that the wiring 606a and the terminal plate 608a can be connected more reliably. Further, since the coil springs 612a and 612b need not be provided, the configuration is simplified.

  In the first and second embodiments, the swing operation members 610a and 610b are swung downward, and the pressing portions 628a and 628b that have closed the openings 614a and 614b are moved forward to open the openings. Although the parts 614a and 614b are configured to be opened, in this case, it may be displayed that the openings 614a and 614b are opened. For example, the same color as that of the push operation units 624a and 624b having the openings 614a and 614b opened is displayed by a lamp or the like, or the same color as that of the push operation units 624a and 624b having the openings 614a and 614b opened. It is conceivable that a rotating plate with a part of the color is rotated and the color is displayed from a window exposing a part of the rotating plate.

  In the first and second embodiments, passages 636a and 638a that restrict the movement of the swing operation member 610a toward the terminal plate 608a at a position where the tip of the pressing portion 628a approaches or contacts the terminal plate 608a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a protrusion protruding inward from the inner wall of the base 602 may be formed, and the movement of the swing operation member 610a toward the terminal plate 608a may be restricted by the protrusion. .

  In the first and second embodiments, the height of the claw 626b is set higher than that of the claw 626a. However, the height is not limited to this, and the height of the claws 626a and 626b may be the same. However, the nail 626a may be set higher.

  In the first and second embodiments, the electrode 640a is formed at the center of the upper end portion of the terminal plate 608a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the electrode 640a can be arbitrarily connected to the terminal plate 608a as long as it protrudes forward. It can be formed in the position.

  In the first and second embodiments, the tongue-like member 644a is formed at the center of the upright portion of the terminal plate 608a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the tongue-like member 644a may protrude downward and obliquely downward. The terminal plate 608a can be formed at an arbitrary position.

  In the first and second embodiments, the electrode 648a is formed in the lower portion of the terminal plate 608a. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It can be formed in the position.

  In the first and second embodiments, ten wiring connection portions 604a are formed. However, the number is not limited thereto, and may be nine or less, or may be eleven or more. Moreover, although ten wiring connection parts 604b were formed, it is not restricted to this, Nine or less may be sufficient and 11 or more may be formed.

  In the first and second embodiments, the claw 642a is formed on both sides of the electrode 640a on the upper end of the terminal plate 608a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only one claw 642a is formed. Alternatively, three or more may be formed.

  In the first and second embodiments, the two electrodes 648a are formed below the terminal plate 608a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only one electrode 648a may be formed, or three You may form above.

In the first and second embodiments, the wiring connection portions 604 arranged to face each other.
Although a and 604b are colored in the same color, they are not limited to this, and may be colored in different colors.

  In the first and second embodiments, the wiring connection portions 604a and 604b arranged adjacent to each other are colored in different colors. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be colored in the same color.

  In the first and second embodiments, the wiring connecting portions 604a and 604b are colored in different colors in other combinations in the adjacent direction. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the same color is used in any combination in the adjacent direction. May be colored.

  In the third embodiment, the height of the push operation unit 624d is set higher than that of the push operation unit 624c. However, the height is not limited to this, and the heights of the push operation units 624c and 624d are the same. Alternatively, the push operation unit 624c may be set higher. In addition, two types of heights are set for the push operation units 624c and 624d. However, the height is not limited to this, and for example, all the push operation units 624c and 624d may have different heights. That is, three or more types of heights can be set. Further, for example, the trajectory of the push operation units 624c and 624d can be set to have a stepped shape, a wavy shape, a convex shape, a concave shape, and other shapes with respect to the height of the push operation portions 624c and 624d.

  In the third embodiment, the length of the push operation unit 624d in the front-rear direction is set shorter than that of the push operation unit 624c. However, the length is not limited to this, and the length of the push operation units 624c, 624d in the front-rear direction. The length may be the same, or the push operation unit 624c may be set shorter. In addition, although two types of lengths in the front-rear direction are set for the push operation units 624c and 624d, the length is not limited to this, and for example, the lengths in the front-rear direction of all the push operation units 624c and 624d may be different. That is, three or more types of lengths in the front-rear direction can be set. Further, for example, the trajectory of the push operation units 624c and 624d can be set to a stepped shape, a wave shape, a convex shape, a concave shape, and other shapes with respect to the length in the front-rear direction of the push operation portions 624c and 624d.

  In the third embodiment, the swing operation member 610c is biased toward the terminal plates 608ca and 608cb by the coil spring 612c. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a plate spring and other springs, urethane rubber, and silicon rubber The swing operation member 610c can be biased toward the terminal plates 608ca and 608cb by other rubber and sponge. Further, without using the coil spring 612c, the center of gravity of the swing operation member 610c can be set so that the pressing portions 628ca and 628cb come into contact with the terminal plates 608ca and 608cb by the weight of the swing operation member 610c. In this case, if the member of the swing operation member 610c that is inclined to the terminal plates 608ca and 608cb is formed of a heavy member such as metal, the pressing portions 628ca and 628cb can be reliably brought into contact with the terminal plates 608ca and 608cb. it can. As a result, the wires 606ca and 606cb are sandwiched between the pressing portion 628ca and the terminal plate 608ca and between the pressing portion 628cb and the terminal plate 608cb by the weight of the swing operation member 610c. The plates 608ca and 608cb can be more reliably connected. Further, since the coil spring 612c need not be provided, the configuration is simplified. This modification can be similarly applied to the wiring connection portion 604d.

In the third embodiment, the swing operation member 610c is swung downward, the pressing portions 628ca and 628cb are moved forward, and the openings 614ca and 614cb are opened. In addition, it may be displayed that the openings 614ca and 614cb are opened. For example, the same color as the color of the push operation unit 624c having the openings 614ca and 614cb opened is displayed with a lamp or the like, or the same color as the color of the push operation unit 624c having the openings 614ca and 614cb opened. It is conceivable to rotate the rotating plate attached to the part and display the color from a window exposing a part of the rotating plate. This modification can be similarly applied to the wiring connection portion 604d.

  In the third embodiment, the height of the claw 626d is set higher than that of the claw 626c. However, the height is not limited to this, and the height of the claw 626c, 626d may be the same. 626c may be set higher.

  In the third embodiment, five wiring connection portions 604c are formed. However, the number is not limited thereto, and may be four or less, or may be six or more. In addition, although five wiring connection portions 604d are formed, the number is not limited thereto, and may be four or less, or may be six or more.

  In the third embodiment, adjacent wiring connection portions 604c and 604d are colored in different colors. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be colored in the same color.

  In the third embodiment, the wiring connecting portions 604c and 604d are colored in different colors in other combinations in the adjacent direction. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the same color is colored in any combination in the adjacent directions. May be.

  In the fourth embodiment, the height of the push operation unit 624f is set higher than that of the push operation unit 624e. However, the height is not limited to this, and the heights of the push operation units 624e and 624f are the same. Alternatively, the push operation unit 624e may be set higher. In addition, although two types of heights are set for the push operation units 624e and 624f, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, all the push operation units 624e and 624f may have different heights. That is, three or more types of heights can be set. Further, for example, with respect to the height of the push operation units 624e and 624f, the trajectory of the push operation units 624e and 624f can be set in a stepped shape, a wave shape, a convex shape, a concave shape, or other shapes.

  In the fourth embodiment, the length of the push operation unit 624f in the front-rear direction is set shorter than that of the push operation unit 624e. However, the length is not limited thereto, and the length of the push operation units 624e, 624f in the front-rear direction is set. The length may be the same, or the push operation unit 624e may be set shorter. In addition, although two types of lengths in the front-rear direction are set for the push operation units 624e and 624f, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the lengths in the front-rear direction of all the push operation units 624e and 624f may be different. That is, three or more types of lengths in the front-rear direction can be set. Further, for example, the trajectory of the push operation units 624e and 624f can be set to a stepped shape, a wavy shape, a convex shape, a concave shape, and other shapes with respect to the length in the front-rear direction of the push operation portions 624e and 624f.

  In the fourth embodiment, the swing operation member 610ea is urged toward the terminal plate 608ea by the coil spring 612e. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The swing operation member 610ea can be biased toward the terminal plate 608ea by rubber or sponge. Further, the center of gravity of the swing operation member 610ea can be set so that the pressing portion 628ea contacts the terminal plate 608ea by the weight of the swing operation member 610ea without using the coil spring 612e. In this case, if the member on the side of the swing operation member 610ea that is inclined to the terminal plate 608ea is made of a heavy member such as metal, the pressing portion 628ea can be reliably brought into contact with the terminal plate 608ea. Accordingly, the wirings 606ea and 606eb are sandwiched between the pressing portion 628ea and the terminal plate 608ea and between the pressing portion 628eb and the terminal plate 608eb by the own weight of the swing operation member 610ea. The plates 608ea and 608eb can be more reliably connected. Further, since the coil spring 612e need not be provided, the configuration is simplified. This modification can be similarly applied to the wiring connection portion 604f.

  In the fourth embodiment, the swing operation member 610ea swings downward, the pressing portions 628ea and 628eb move forward and backward, respectively, and the openings 614ea and 614eb open. In this case, it may be displayed that the openings 614ea and 614eb are opened. For example, the same color as the color of the push operation unit 624e having the openings 614ea and 614eb opened is displayed with a lamp or the like, or the same color as the color of the push operation unit 624e having the openings 614ea and 614eb opened. It is conceivable to rotate the rotating plate attached to the part and display the color from a window exposing a part of the rotating plate. This modification can be similarly applied to the wiring connection portion 604f.

  In the fourth embodiment, the height of the claw 626f is set higher than that of the claw 626e. However, the height is not limited to this, and the height of the claw 626e, 626f may be the same, 626e may be set higher.

  In the fourth embodiment, five wiring connection portions 604e are formed. However, the number is not limited thereto, and may be four or less, or may be six or more. Further, although five wiring connection portions 604f are formed, the number is not limited to this, and may be four or less, or may be six or more.

  In the fourth embodiment, the adjacent wiring connection portions 604e and 604f are colored in different colors. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be colored in the same color.

  In the fourth embodiment, the wiring connecting portions 604e and 604f are colored in different colors in other combinations in the adjacent direction. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the same color is colored in any combination in the adjacent directions. May be.

  Further, in the first to fourth embodiments, in the case of the latent probability big hit, it is configured to output the hourly jackpot signal with a predetermined time delay when it is in the time-short state, but the present invention is not limited to this. It can also be configured to output almost simultaneously with the transmission of 5.

  Further, in the first to fourth embodiments, in the JUB big hit and the sudden big hit, the time-saving big hit signal is outputted after being delayed for a predetermined time, and in the latent big hit and the small hit, the short-time big hit signal is not outputted. Although not limited to this, in JUB jackpot and sudden hit jackpot, a short hit jackpot signal is output from the transmission time of the opening commands 3 and 4 to the transmission time of the ending commands 3 and 4, and in the latent jackpot and the jackpot, A jackpot signal with a shortened time may be output from a time when the opening commands 3 and 4 are transmitted until a predetermined time (for example, 25 [s]).

  As a result, since a jackpot signal with a short time is output from the opening command to the elapse of a predetermined time in any of the JUB jackpot, the sudden jackpot, the latent jackpot, and the jackpot, the game type is displayed on the display of the calling lamp device 500 until the predetermined time elapses. Cannot be distinguished.

  In the first to fourth embodiments, the calling lamp device 500 is connected to the pachinko machine 10 and the hall computer 530. However, the invention is not limited thereto, and the calling lamp apparatus 500 is connected to the hall computer 530 to call the calling lamp. The device 500 may be connected to the hall computer 530.

Further, in the first to fourth embodiments, in the time-short state, control is performed so that the variation time of the production symbol is shorter than that in the normal state, and the winning opportunity at the start winning opening 84 is increased from that in the normal state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to perform control so that the variation time of the effect design does not change from the normal state, and only the winning opportunity to the start winning opening 84 is increased from the normal state. In short, it is only necessary to at least suppress the digestion of the game ball in the short-time state.

  Further, in the first to fourth embodiments, the stop type command is configured as a command for designating an out symbol, a non-probable variable symbol, a probable variable symbol, or a random symbol. It can also be configured as a command for designating a symbol corresponding to a small hit. In this case, the stop type command includes a command for specifying a stop symbol at the time of losing, a command for specifying a stop symbol at the time of non-probable variation jackpot, a command for specifying a stop symbol at probability variation jackpot, A command for designating a stop symbol for a JUB jackpot, a command for designating a stop symbol for a sudden jackpot, a command for designating a stop symbol for a latent jackpot, and a stop symbol for a small jackpot Command to specify.

  In the first to fourth embodiments, the processing for clearing the time-saving jackpot signal data (steps S710 and S712) is provided after the processing in step S708. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the processing in step S850 is performed. It can also be provided next.

  In the first to fourth embodiments, a latch circuit (not shown) of the main controller 162 outputs a HIGH level signal until the time-saving jackpot signal data in the command buffer is cleared. The time-saving jackpot signal is latched only for the execution period of the main process after the time-saving jackpot signal is output. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a latch circuit is not provided, and the HIGH level is set for each execution period of the main process. It can also be configured such that the signal is output for a predetermined time (a time shorter than the execution cycle). As a result, it is not necessary to provide a latch circuit, and the configuration is simplified.

  In the first to fourth embodiments, nine game balls are won in the big winning opening 83a as the end condition of the long open round, the end condition of the short open round, and the end condition of the small hit effect. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the number of game balls as the end condition of the long open round, the number of game balls as the end condition of the short open round, and the number of game balls as the end condition of the small hit effect may be different.

  Further, in the first to fourth embodiments, the calling lamp device 500 is provided separately from the pachinko machine 10. However, the invention is not limited thereto, and the calling lamp device 500 may be built in the pachinko machine 10. .

  Further, in the first to fourth embodiments, in the JUB big hit, the sudden hit big hit or the latent big hit, the short hit big hit signal is output immediately before the end of the short open round. It can also be configured to output a jackpot signal with a short time after the opening round ends.

  In the first to fourth embodiments, the main controller 162 determines the stop symbol type, and the display controller 302 determines the specific details of the stop symbol. Not limited to this, the main controller 162 can be configured to determine the specific content of the stop symbol.

  As a result, the display control device 302 does not need to determine the specific content of the stop symbol, so the processing load on the display control device 302 can be reduced. In addition, since the stop symbol table becomes unnecessary, the data capacity of the program ROM 372 can be reduced.

  Further, in the first to fourth embodiments, the big hit and miss common fluctuation pattern table 406 is not provided, but the big hit and miss common fluctuation pattern table 406 may be provided.

  Further, in the first to fourth embodiments, there are a plurality of values such as the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter CS, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the big hit and miss, the big hit type, and the reserved ball number counter value N. Although the configuration is such that the variation pattern is determined based on the elements, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern may be determined based on at least one of these factors.

  In the first to fourth embodiments, the winning at the start winning opening 84 is set to be held up to a maximum of 4 times, but this is not limiting, and the number of times is 3 times or less, or 5 times or more. It can also be set to hold until (for example, 8 times). Further, since the reserved ball symbols Rm1 to Rm4 are displayed on the effect symbol display device 91, the hold lamp 96 may not be provided. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 93, it is not necessary to perform the lighting display by the holding lamp 96.

  In the first to fourth embodiments, the passage of the through gate 85 is set to be suspended up to a maximum of 4 times. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of times is 3 times or less or 5 times or more (for example, , 8 times) can also be set to hold. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 93, the holding lamp 95 may not be provided, and the lighting display may not be performed by the holding lamp 95.

  Further, in the first to fourth embodiments, the normal symbol variation display is configured to be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of the lamp in the display unit 94a. 93 or effect symbol display device 91 can be used. Similarly, a lighting display corresponding to lighting of the hold lamp 95 may be performed by the effect symbol display device 91.

  Further, in the first to fourth embodiments, when a big hit is made, the big winning opening 83a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time, and when a gaming ball wins the big winning opening 83a, 15 gaming balls are obtained. However, the jackpot is not limited to this. A big prize opening that is opened and closed separately from the big prize opening 83a is provided in the game area. When a big hit is made, the big prize opening 83a is opened for a predetermined time, and when a game ball wins the big prize opening 83a, what is the big prize opening 83a? It is also possible to configure a game state in which a separately provided special winning opening is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times as a jackpot.

  In the first to fourth embodiments, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern random number counter CS. Instead, three fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are used. It is also possible to configure so as to determine the variation pattern.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that can take any value within a numerical range of “0” to “198”. At each update, “1” is added to the current value, and when the maximum value (“198”) is exceeded, the initial value is restored. In the case of the variation type counter CS1, the initial value is set to “0”.

  The variation type counter CS2 is configured as a loop counter that can take any value within a numerical range of “0” to “240”, for example. At each update, “1” is added to the current value, and when the maximum value (“240”) is exceeded, the initial value is restored. In the case of the variation type counter CS2, the initial value is set to “0”.

  Based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, rough fluctuation times such as normal reach, super reach, and special reach are determined. Further, based on the value of the variation type counter CS2, a variation time (in other words, the number of variation symbols) until the final stop symbol (medium symbol) is stopped and displayed after the reach effect is determined. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, the display control device 302 determines the reach type of the effect symbol and the mode of detailed variation display. Accordingly, a wide variety of variation patterns can be easily realized by combining the variation type counters CS1 and CS2. Also, the variation display mode can be determined only by the variation type counter CS1, or the variation display mode can be similarly determined by the combination of the variation type counter CS1 and the stop symbol.

  The variation type counter CS3 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that can take any value within a numerical range of “0” to “162”. At each update, “1” is added to the current value, and when the maximum value (“162”) is exceeded, the initial value is restored. In the case of the variation type counter CS3, the initial value is set to “0”.

  In the effect symbol display device 91, in addition to the effect symbol change display, a notice effect that slides the effect display that is variably displayed or passes a notice character for notifying the occurrence of the reach effect is performed. The effect pattern of the notice effect is selected by the variation type counter CS3. Specifically, there is an effect pattern in which the time required for the notice effect is added to the change time, an effect pattern in which the change time is subtracted in order to shorten the change display time, or an effect pattern in which the change time is not added or subtracted. Selected. As with the variation pattern table 406, the variation type counter CS3 is provided with a plurality of effect pattern tables with different ranges of random number counter values from which an effect pattern is selected. Each effect pattern table is configured such that the selection ratio of each effect pattern varies depending on whether the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a probable change state or a normal state, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  As the effect time addition / subtraction value, for example, based on the value of the variation type counter CS3, when the variation display time is not changed, when the variation display time is added by 1 second, when the variation display time is added by 2 seconds, Four types of addition / subtraction values are determined when the display time is subtracted by 1 second. When the variation time is added or subtracted, the effect symbol display device 91 performs a notice effect that increases the expected value of the jackpot. In the case of a jackpot, since the probability that an added value of 2 seconds is selected is set high, the player can expect a jackpot by confirming the notice effect.

  In this way, the variation time of the effect symbol is determined by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, and the time to be added to or subtracted from the variation time is determined by the variation type counter CS3. Accordingly, the final fluctuation time until the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed is determined by the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3.

  In the first to fourth embodiments, the variation pattern table 406 is determined regardless of the current game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern table is also determined according to the current game state. It can also be configured to determine 406.

In the probability variation state, a large variation pattern table 406 has a wide range of random number counter values corresponding to non-reach variation patterns “10” to “238” so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. It is easy to select non-reach out. In the fluctuation pattern table 406, the range of the random number counter value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of out-of-reach is narrowed to “0” to “9”, and it is difficult to select out-of-reach. Therefore, since the reach effect is difficult to select in the probability variation state, the number of variable displays per unit time is increased, and a big hit is likely to occur early.

  On the other hand, in the normal state, if a random number counter value is not stored in the reserved ball storage area, a random number corresponding to a non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern in order to secure a winning time of the game ball to the start winning opening 84 A variation pattern table 406 having a narrow counter value range of “51” to “238” is selected, and it is difficult to select non-reach out. In the variation pattern table 406, the range of the random number counter value corresponding to the variation pattern of out-of-reach is wide as “9” to “50”, and out-of-reach is easily selected. Therefore, in the normal state, the winning time of the game ball to the start winning opening 84 can be secured, so that the effect symbol display device 91 is likely to continuously perform the variable display.

  In the first to fourth embodiments, the main control device 162, the payout control device 242, the sound lamp control device 143, the display control device 302, and the effect symbol display device 91 transmit and receive data using electrical signals. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and data can be transmitted and received by optical communication. Further, the present invention is not limited to wired communication, and data can be transmitted and received by wireless communication using radio waves or infrared rays.

  In the first to fourth embodiments, the sound lamp control device 143 is configured to control the display control device 302. Instead, the display control device 302 controls the sound lamp control device 143. It can also be configured to. Further, instead of the sound lamp control device 143 and the display control device 302, a single control device having both functions of the sound lamp control device 143 and the display control device 302 may be provided.

  In the first to fourth embodiments, the main control device 162 transmits a command to the sound lamp control device 143, so that the main control device 162 controls the display control device 302 via the sound lamp control device 143. Although the configuration is such that the control is performed indirectly, the main control device 162 may directly control the display control device 302 by transmitting the command directly to the display control device 302.

  In the first to fourth embodiments, the main control device 162 is configured to determine the variation pattern based on the value of the variation pattern random number counter CS. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display control device 302 ( Alternatively, the voice lamp control device 143) may be provided with a fluctuation pattern random number counter CS, and the display control device 302 (or voice lamp control device 143) may be configured to determine the fluctuation pattern based on the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter CS. it can. A similar modification can be applied to the determination of the stop type. That is, the main control device 162 determines up to the fluctuation pattern table 406 based on the reach random number counter CS and the like, and the display control device 302 (or the sound lamp control device 143) changes based on the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter CS. Determine the pattern. In this case, the main controller 162 needs to determine the variation time for the variation display or the like of the special symbol display device 93. The variation time is determined based on the reach random number counter CS.

  As a result, the main control device 162 does not need to determine the variation pattern, and therefore the processing load on the main control device 162 can be reduced.

  Further, in the first to fourth embodiments, the effect symbol display device 91 is configured to perform the variable display of the effect symbols by scrolling the effect symbols in the vertical direction, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to perform a variation display of the effect symbol by scrolling the symbol in the horizontal direction or by moving and displaying the effect symbol along a predetermined route such as an L shape.

  In the first to fourth embodiments, the present invention can be applied to other types of pachinko machines and the like. For example, a pachinko machine that unlocks a specified number of times when a game ball wins a specific area of a special device, a pachinko machine that wins a right when a game ball wins a specific area of a special device, and other objects The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and other types of pachinko machines equipped with the above. Further, the present invention can be applied to a pachinko machine or the like in which game balls are not lent through the ball lending device Y.

  The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine. For example, a slot machine is a known machine in which a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device that displays the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, and the operation means for starting (for example, the operation lever) is operated. As a trigger, the identification information variation display is started, the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) is triggered, or when a predetermined time elapses, the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed. When the combination of identification information at the time of the stop is a specific one, it becomes a slot machine that generates a special prize state that gives a player a predetermined game value. In this case, examples of game media include coins and medals.

  The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused. As a basic concept of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, “a display device for confirming and displaying identification information after variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, For example, after a predetermined amount of game ball is inserted based on the operation of the button, the change display of the identification information is started by the operation of the start operation unit (for example, the operation lever), and the stop operation unit (for example, the stop) Button) or when a predetermined period of time has passed, the change display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed, and if the combination of the identification information at the time of the stop is a specific combination, A gaming machine that generates a special prize state that gives a predetermined gaming value. In this case, a large amount of game balls are paid out to the player in the lower tray.

  In addition to the inventions described in the column “Means for Solving the Problems”, the following inventions may be employed. Hereinafter, explanations will be given while showing definitions of functions, effects and terms as necessary. Note that the inventions B to G can be applied to the invention A. In addition, the inventions C to G can be applied to the invention B. In addition, the inventions D to G can be applied to the invention C. In addition, the inventions E to G can be applied to the invention D. The inventions F and G can also be applied to the invention E. The invention G can also be applied to the invention F.

[Invention A1] The connection terminal device of Invention A1 is
A connection terminal device comprising a base and a plurality of wiring connection portions formed on the base,
The wiring connection portion is
An opening formed in the base and into which wiring is inserted;
A terminal portion electrically connected to the wiring;
A swing operation member in which one end portion is swingably supported by the base body, a push operation portion is formed at the other end portion, and a press portion that presses the wiring inserted from the opening portion against the terminal portion is formed. And
One of the wiring connection portions is arranged adjacent to the other wiring connection portion so that the push operation portions are arranged side by side, and the height of the push operation portion in the wiring connection portion is the other It is set so that it may differ from the height of the said pushing operation part in a wiring connection part.

  In the prior art, if the entire width of the connection terminal device 800 is to be shortened, the width of each wiring connection portion 804 must be shortened, which makes it difficult to connect the wiring. It was. For example, when trying to push in the pushing operation unit 824 of the target wiring connection unit 804, the width of the wiring connection unit 804 is short, so that two or more adjacent pushing operation units 824 are accidentally pushed simultaneously. Conceivable.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the connection terminal device of the invention A1, when the push operation portion is pushed in, the swing operation member swings around the one end portion. When the wiring is inserted from the opening, the wiring is sandwiched between the pressing portion and the terminal portion and is electrically connected to the terminal portion.

  At this time, the two wiring connecting portions are arranged so that the pushing operation portions are arranged side by side, and the height of the pushing operation portion in the wiring connecting portions is set to be different. Even if the size is reduced, the possibility that the adjacent pressing operation units are erroneously pressed at the same time can be reduced. Therefore, even if the overall width of the connection terminal device is reduced, the wiring can be easily connected as compared with the conventional case.

  Here, the one end portion is a concept including one end and its periphery. The other end is a concept including the other end and its periphery. Hereinafter, the same applies to the connection terminal devices of Inventions B1, F1 and G1.

  Further, the terminal portion only needs to be electrically connected to the wiring, and may be plate-shaped like a terminal plate, or may be linear like a wiring. In addition, it may be rod-shaped like a protrusion. Hereinafter, the same applies to the connection terminal devices of Inventions B1, F1 and G1.

[Invention A2] Furthermore, the connection terminal device of Invention A2 is the connection terminal device of Invention A1,
One of the wiring connection portions is arranged adjacent to the other wiring connection portions so that the push operation portions are arranged side by side, and the length in the direction toward the tip of the push operation portion in the wiring connection portions The length is set to be different from the length in the direction toward the tip of the push-in operation portion in the other wiring connection portion.

  With such a configuration, the two wiring connection portions are arranged so that the push operation portions are arranged side by side, and the lengths of the wiring connection portions in the direction toward the tip of the push operation portion are set to be different. Therefore, even if the overall width of the connection terminal device is reduced, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the adjacent push-in operation parts are simultaneously pushed in by mistake. Therefore, even if the overall width of the connection terminal device is reduced, the connection of wiring is further facilitated.

[Invention A3] Furthermore, the connection terminal device of Invention A3 is the connection terminal device of any one of Inventions A1 and A2,
Furthermore, it is provided with the urging means which urges | biases the said rocking | fluctuation operation member in the direction in which the said press part contacts the said terminal part.

  With such a configuration, when the pushing operation portion is pushed against the urging force of the urging means, the oscillating operation member oscillates around the one end. Then, when the wiring is inserted from the opening and the drag to the urging means is released, the wiring is sandwiched between the pressing part and the terminal part by the urging force of the urging means, and is electrically connected to the terminal part. Is done.

  Thereby, since the wiring is sandwiched between the pressing portion and the terminal portion by the urging force of the urging means, the wiring and the terminal portion can be more reliably connected.

  Here, the biasing means includes, for example, an elastic body. Examples of the elastic body include coil springs, leaf springs and other springs, urethane rubber, silicon rubber and other rubbers, and sponges. Hereinafter, the same applies to the connection terminal devices of the inventions B3, F4, and G4.

[Invention A4] Furthermore, the connection terminal device of Invention A4 is the connection terminal device of any one of Inventions A1 and A2,
The center of gravity of the swing operation member is set so that the pressing portion comes into contact with the terminal portion by the weight of the swing operation member.

  With such a configuration, when the push-in operation portion is pushed against the weight of the swing operation member, the swing operation member swings around the one end. When the wiring is inserted from the opening and the swing of the swing operation member is released, the wire is sandwiched between the pressing portion and the terminal portion by the weight of the swing operation member, and electrically connected to the terminal portion. Connected.

  Thereby, since wiring is pinched | interposed between a press part and a terminal part by dead weight of the rocking | fluctuation operation member, a wiring and a terminal part can be connected more reliably. Further, since the urging means and the like need not be provided, the configuration is simplified.

[Invention A5] Furthermore, the connection terminal device of Invention A5 is the connection terminal device of Invention A3,
Furthermore, a restriction part for restricting the expansion / contraction direction of the urging means is provided.

  With such a configuration, since the expansion / contraction operation of the urging means is restricted by the restricting portion, the swing operation member can be appropriately urged toward the terminal portion.

[Invention A6] Furthermore, the connection terminal device of Invention A6 is the connection terminal device of any one of Inventions A1 to A5.
The rocking operation member is characterized in that a valley portion recessed inward is formed on a surface between the pressing portion and the rocking shaft of the rocking operation member and facing the terminal portion. To do.

  With such a configuration, when the swing operation member is swung, a space is formed between the pressing portion and the terminal portion, so that the wiring can be easily inserted.

[Invention A7] Furthermore, the connection terminal device of Invention A7 is the connection terminal device of any one of Inventions A1 to A6.
Furthermore, a stopper is provided that restricts the movement of the swing operation member toward the terminal portion at a position where the pressing portion approaches or contacts the terminal portion.

  If it is such a structure, the movement to the terminal part side of a rocking | fluctuation operation member will be controlled by the stopper in the position where a press part adjoins or contacts a terminal part.

Thereby, the possibility that the pressing portion excessively presses and damages the wiring can be reduced.
[Invention A8] Furthermore, the connection terminal device of Invention A8 is the connection terminal device of any one of Inventions A1 to A7,
A claw projecting upward is formed at the top end of the pushing operation portion.

  With such a configuration, it is only necessary to place the finger on the nail and push the push operation unit, so that the push operation unit is easy to operate.

[Invention A9] Furthermore, the connection terminal device of Invention A9 is the connection terminal device of Invention A2,
A claw protruding upward is formed at the top of the tip of the push-in operation part,
The height of the claw of the push operation unit that is short in the direction toward the tip among the adjacent push operation units is set higher than the claw of the other push operation unit that is adjacent. And

  With such a configuration, it is only necessary to place the finger on the nail and push the push operation unit, so that the push operation unit is easy to operate. In addition, it is difficult to put a finger on the pushing operation portion whose length in the direction toward the tip is short. However, since the height of the nail is high, it becomes easy to put the finger on the nail, and the pushing operation portion becomes easier to operate.

[Invention A10] Furthermore, the connection terminal device of Invention A10 is the connection terminal device of any one of Inventions A1 to A9.
The terminal portion is formed with an electrode that bends forward.

  With such a configuration, since the wiring easily comes into contact with the electrode, the wiring and the terminal portion can be more reliably connected.

[Invention A11] Furthermore, the connection terminal device of Invention A11 is the connection terminal device of any one of Inventions A1 to A10,
A claw protruding upward is formed at the upper end portion of the terminal portion, and the claw is fitted in a fitting hole formed in the inner wall of the base.

If it is such a structure, it can control that a terminal part moves to the direction of order.
[Invention A12] Furthermore, the connection terminal device of Invention A12 is the connection terminal device of any one of Inventions A1 to A11.
The terminal portion is formed with a tongue-like member that protrudes obliquely downward, and the tongue-like member is fitted in a fitting hole formed in the inner wall of the base.

If it is such a structure, it can control that a terminal part moves to the direction of order.
[Invention A13] Furthermore, the connection terminal device of Invention A13 is the connection terminal device of any one of Inventions A1 to A12.
The terminal portion is formed with an electrode extending obliquely upward in the front direction, and the electrode is disposed on a protrusion formed on the inner wall of the base.

If it is such a structure, it can control that a terminal part moves below.
[Invention A14] Furthermore, the connection terminal device of Invention A14 is the connection terminal device of any one of Inventions A1 to A13.
The wiring connection portions arranged opposite to each other output the same signal and are colored in the same color.

  With such a configuration, it is easy to identify the wiring connection part that forms a set, and therefore the possibility of erroneous connection of wiring can be reduced.

[Invention A15] Furthermore, the connection terminal device of Invention A15 is the connection terminal device of any one of Inventions A1 to A14.
The wiring connection portions arranged adjacent to each other are colored in different colors.

  With such a configuration, it is easy to distinguish between adjacent wiring connection portions, so that the possibility of erroneous wiring connection can be reduced.

[Invention A16] Furthermore, the connection terminal device of Invention A16 is the connection terminal device of any one of Inventions A1 to A15,
The present invention is applied to a gaming machine and outputs information related to the gaming machine.

  If it is such a structure, if wiring and a terminal part are connected, the information regarding a gaming machine will be output.

  Thereby, a gaming machine whose various sizes are defined in the standard is preferable because a large number of wiring connection portions can be provided while maintaining the width of the connection terminal device.

[Invention A17] On the other hand, the gaming machine of Invention A17 is
A connection terminal device according to the invention A1 to A16 is provided.

  Such a configuration is suitable for a gaming machine whose various sizes are defined by the standard, since a large number of wiring connection portions can be provided while maintaining the width of the connection terminal device.

[Invention B1] On the other hand, the connection terminal device of Invention B1 is
A connection terminal device comprising a base and a plurality of wiring connection portions formed on the base,
The wiring connection portion is
An opening formed in the base and into which wiring is inserted;
A terminal portion electrically connected to the wiring;
A swing operation member in which one end portion is swingably supported by the base body, a push operation portion is formed at the other end portion, and a press portion that presses the wiring inserted from the opening portion against the terminal portion is formed. And
One of the wiring connection portions is arranged adjacent to the other wiring connection portions so that the push operation portions are arranged side by side, and the length in the direction toward the tip of the push operation portion in the wiring connection portions The length is set to be different from the length in the direction toward the tip of the push-in operation portion in the other wiring connection portion.

  With such a configuration, when the push-in operation unit is pushed in, the swing operation member swings around the one end. When the wiring is inserted from the opening, the wiring is sandwiched between the pressing portion and the terminal portion and is electrically connected to the terminal portion.

  At this time, since the two wiring connecting portions are arranged so that the pushing operation portions are arranged side by side, and the lengths in the direction toward the tip of the pushing operation portion in the wiring connecting portions are set to be different, the connection terminal device Even if the overall width of the is reduced, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the adjacent pressing operation unit is erroneously pressed simultaneously. Therefore, even if the overall width of the connection terminal device is reduced, the wiring can be easily connected as compared with the conventional case.

[Invention B2] Furthermore, the connection terminal device of Invention B2 is the connection terminal device of Invention B1,
One of the wiring connection portions is arranged adjacent to the other wiring connection portion so that the push operation portions are arranged side by side, and the height of the push operation portion in the wiring connection portion is the other It is set so that it may differ from the height of the said pushing operation part in a wiring connection part.

  In such a configuration, since the two wiring connecting portions are arranged so that the pushing operation portions are arranged side by side, and the height of the pushing operation portion in the wiring connecting portions is set to be different, the connection terminal device Even if the overall width of the is reduced, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the adjacent pressing operation unit is erroneously pressed simultaneously. Therefore, even if the overall width of the connection terminal device is reduced, the connection of wiring is further facilitated.

[Invention B3] Furthermore, the connection terminal device of Invention B3 is the connection terminal device of any one of Inventions B1 and B2,
Furthermore, it is provided with the urging means which urges | biases the said rocking | fluctuation operation member in the direction in which the said press part contacts the said terminal part.

  With such a configuration, when the pushing operation portion is pushed against the urging force of the urging means, the oscillating operation member oscillates around the one end. Then, when the wiring is inserted from the opening and the drag to the urging means is released, the wiring is sandwiched between the pressing part and the terminal part by the urging force of the urging means, and is electrically connected to the terminal part. Is done.

  Thereby, since the wiring is sandwiched between the pressing portion and the terminal portion by the urging force of the urging means, the wiring and the terminal portion can be more reliably connected.

[Invention B4] Furthermore, the connection terminal device of Invention B4 is the connection terminal device of any one of Inventions B1 and B2,
The center of gravity of the swing operation member is set so that the pressing portion comes into contact with the terminal portion by the weight of the swing operation member.

  With such a configuration, when the push-in operation portion is pushed against the weight of the swing operation member, the swing operation member swings around the one end. When the wiring is inserted from the opening and the swing of the swing operation member is released, the wire is sandwiched between the pressing portion and the terminal portion by the weight of the swing operation member, and electrically connected to the terminal portion. Connected.

  Thereby, since wiring is pinched | interposed between a press part and a terminal part by dead weight of the rocking | fluctuation operation member, a wiring and a terminal part can be connected more reliably. Further, since the urging means and the like need not be provided, the configuration is simplified.

[Invention B5] Furthermore, the connection terminal device of Invention B5 is the connection terminal device of Invention B3,
Furthermore, a restriction part for restricting the expansion / contraction direction of the urging means is provided.

  With such a configuration, since the expansion / contraction operation of the urging means is restricted by the restricting portion, the swing operation member can be appropriately urged toward the terminal portion.

[Invention B6] Furthermore, the connection terminal device of Invention B6 is the connection terminal device of any one of Inventions B1 to B5,
The rocking operation member is characterized in that a valley portion recessed inward is formed on a surface between the pressing portion and the rocking shaft of the rocking operation member and facing the terminal portion. To do.

  With such a configuration, when the swing operation member is swung, a space is formed between the pressing portion and the terminal portion, so that the wiring can be easily inserted.

[Invention B7] Furthermore, the connection terminal device of Invention B7 is the connection terminal device of any one of Inventions B1 to B6,
Furthermore, a stopper is provided that restricts the movement of the swing operation member toward the terminal portion at a position where the pressing portion approaches or contacts the terminal portion.

  If it is such a structure, the movement to the terminal part side of a rocking | fluctuation operation member will be controlled by the stopper in the position where a press part adjoins or contacts a terminal part.

Thereby, the possibility that the pressing portion excessively presses and damages the wiring can be reduced.
[Invention B8] Furthermore, the connection terminal device according to Invention B8 is the connection terminal device according to any one of Inventions B1 to B7.
A claw projecting upward is formed at the top end of the pushing operation portion.

  With such a configuration, it is only necessary to place the finger on the nail and push the push operation unit, so that the push operation unit is easy to operate.

[Invention B9] Furthermore, the connection terminal device of Invention B9 is the connection terminal device of Invention B1,
A claw protruding upward is formed at the top of the tip of the push-in operation part,
The height of the claw of the push operation unit that is short in the direction toward the tip among the adjacent push operation units is set higher than the claw of the other push operation unit that is adjacent. And

  With such a configuration, it is only necessary to place the finger on the nail and push the push operation unit, so that the push operation unit is easy to operate. In addition, it is difficult to put a finger on the pushing operation portion whose length in the direction toward the tip is short. However, since the height of the nail is high, it becomes easy to put the finger on the nail, and the pushing operation portion becomes easier to operate.

[Invention B10] Furthermore, the connection terminal device of Invention B10 is the connection terminal device of any one of Inventions B1 to B9,
The terminal portion is formed with an electrode that bends forward.

  With such a configuration, since the wiring easily comes into contact with the electrode, the wiring and the terminal portion can be more reliably connected.

[Invention B11] Furthermore, the connection terminal device of Invention B11 is the connection terminal device of any one of Inventions B1 to B10,
A claw protruding upward is formed at the upper end portion of the terminal portion, and the claw is fitted in a fitting hole formed in the inner wall of the base.

If it is such a structure, it can control that a terminal part moves to the direction of order.
[Invention B12] Furthermore, the connection terminal device according to Invention B12 is the connection terminal device according to any one of Inventions B1 to B11.
The terminal portion is formed with a tongue-like member that protrudes obliquely downward, and the tongue-like member is fitted in a fitting hole formed in the inner wall of the base.

If it is such a structure, it can control that a terminal part moves to the direction of order.
[Invention B13] Furthermore, the connection terminal device according to Invention B13 is the connection terminal device according to any one of Inventions B1 to B12.
The terminal portion is formed with an electrode extending obliquely upward in the front direction, and the electrode is disposed on a protrusion formed on the inner wall of the base.

If it is such a structure, it can control that a terminal part moves below.
[Invention B14] Furthermore, the connection terminal device of Invention B14 is the connection terminal device of any one of Inventions B1 to B13.
The wiring connection portions arranged opposite to each other output the same signal and are colored in the same color.

  With such a configuration, it is easy to identify the wiring connection part that forms a set, and therefore the possibility of erroneous connection of wiring can be reduced.

[Invention B15] Furthermore, the connection terminal device of Invention B15 is the connection terminal device of any one of Inventions B1 to B14.
The wiring connection portions arranged adjacent to each other are colored in different colors.

  With such a configuration, it is easy to distinguish between adjacent wiring connection portions, so that the possibility of erroneous wiring connection can be reduced.

[Invention B16] Furthermore, the connection terminal device according to Invention B16 is the connection terminal device according to any one of Inventions B1 to B15.
The present invention is applied to a gaming machine and outputs information related to the gaming machine.

  If it is such a structure, if wiring and a terminal part are connected, the information regarding a gaming machine will be output.

  Thereby, a gaming machine whose various sizes are defined in the standard is preferable because a large number of wiring connection portions can be provided while maintaining the width of the connection terminal device.

[Invention B17] On the other hand, the gaming machine of Invention B17 is
A connecting terminal device according to invention B1 to invention B16 is provided.

  Such a configuration is suitable for a gaming machine whose various sizes are defined by the standard, since a large number of wiring connection portions can be provided while maintaining the width of the connection terminal device.

[Invention C1] On the other hand, the gaming machine of Invention C1 is
Lottery means for performing lottery for generating the first special prize state or the second special prize state in response to establishment of the predetermined condition;
Identification information changing means for changing and displaying the identification information on the display means;
A first special prize state generating means for stopping and displaying the identification information with a predetermined content and generating the first special prize state when it is determined that the first special prize state is to be generated based on the lottery result of the lottery means; ,
When it is determined that the second special prize state is to be generated based on the lottery result of the lottery means, the identification information is stopped and displayed with contents other than the predetermined contents, and the second special prize is generated to generate the second special prize state. State generating means;
A special status signal output means for outputting a special status signal indicating the occurrence of the special status,
When it is determined that the first special prize state is to be generated based on the lottery result of the lottery means, the special prize state signal output means outputs the special prize state signal, and based on the lottery result of the lottery means, the first prize state signal is output. If it is determined that two special prize states are to be generated, the special prize state signal is not output.

  Conventionally, as a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, it is connected to a calling lamp device disposed above the gaming machine, and, for example, when a big hit occurs, a jackpot signal indicating that a big hit has occurred is output to the calling lamp device Is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-302145). In the calling lamp device, the number of jackpots is totalized and displayed based on the jackpot signal from the gaming machine.

  However, in the case of a conventional game machine, in the case of a sudden big hit, it is intended to give unexpectedness as if it suddenly shifted to a probable state without making a big hit, Since a jackpot signal is output when a sudden big hit occurs, the player can grasp that the big hit has occurred by looking at the display of the calling lamp device, and there is a problem that the game taste is reduced. .

  In addition, for example, when another game type is displayed with a suspicion symbol stopped and an extremely short hit is generated, and then a second suspicion big hit that does not change the game state is set, the player views the suspicion symbol. It is not possible to distinguish whether it is a big hit or a second big hit, and we have the expectation that a big hit will occur. However, since a jackpot signal is output to the calling lamp device when a sudden jackpot is generated, the player grasps that the sudden jackpot or the second sudden jackpot has occurred by looking at the display on the calling lamp device. There was a problem that the game preferences were reduced.

  In addition, for example, when displaying that the big hit has occurred after the occurrence of the big hit, the player does not know whether or not the big hit has occurred until he sees the display, and the big hit will occur. Have the expectation. However, since a jackpot signal is output to the calling lamp device when a sudden jackpot occurs, the player can confirm that a sudden jackpot has occurred if he / she looks at the display of the calling lamp device even before the display. There was a problem that it was possible to grasp and the taste of the game decreased.

  On the other hand, in the case of the configuration of the gaming machine of the invention C1, the lottery means performs lottery to generate the first special prize state or the second special prize state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the identification information changing means Thus, the identification information is changed and displayed on the display means.

  When it is determined that the first special prize state is to be generated based on the lottery result of the lottery means, the first special prize state generating means stops the identification information with a predetermined content, and the first special prize state is generated. Then, the special status signal is output by the special status signal output means.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special prize state is to be generated based on the lottery result of the lottery means, the identification information is stopped and displayed with the contents other than the predetermined contents by the second special prize state generating means. A condition occurs. Since the identification information is stopped and displayed with contents other than the predetermined contents, it is difficult to recognize that the special prize state has occurred. Then, no special status signal is output by the special status signal output means.

Thereby, when it is determined that the first special prize state is generated, the special prize state signal is output, whereas when it is determined that the second special prize state is generated, the special prize state signal is not output, so the player The user cannot grasp that the second special prize state has occurred even when viewing the display of the calling lamp device or the like. Further, for example, when the second winning big hit is set as the other game type, the player cannot grasp that the second special prize state has occurred even when viewing the display of the calling lamp device or the like. In addition, for example, when displaying that the big hit has occurred after the occurrence of the big hit, the player cannot grasp that the second special prize state has occurred even when viewing the display of the calling lamp device or the like. . Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game taste is reduced as compared with the conventional case.

  Here, as the establishment of the predetermined condition, in the case of a pachinko machine, for example, a gaming ball wins a winning prize opening, and in the case of a pachislot machine, for example, an operation lever for instructing a game start is operated. It is included. Hereinafter, the same applies to the gaming machines of inventions D1 and E1.

  The special prize state is a gaming state that gives a gaming value advantageous to the player. For a pachinko machine, for example, a non-probable big hit, a probable big hit, a JUB big hit, a sudden big hit, a latent big hit, a small hit In the case of a pachislot machine, for example, a big bonus, a challenge time, and a small role are included. Hereinafter, the same applies to the gaming machines of inventions D1 and E1.

  The identification information refers to characters, figures, designs, images, codes, symbols, colors, other information that can be identified through vision, sound or other information that can be identified through five senses other than vision, or a combination thereof. Hereinafter, the same applies to the gaming machines of inventions D1 and E1.

  In addition, the identification information change display includes, for example, sequentially changing and displaying the identification information as in LED display, and displaying the identification information while fluctuating. Therefore, the change is not necessarily limited to fluctuation. Hereinafter, the same applies to the gaming machines of inventions D1 and E1.

  In addition, the timing at which the identification information is stopped and displayed with the predetermined content and the timing at which the special prize state is generated may be either first or simultaneously. If the timing at which the identification information is stopped and displayed is earlier, the expectation for the special prize state can be improved. On the other hand, if the timing for generating the special prize state is earlier, the unexpectedness can be improved. Hereinafter, the same applies to the gaming machines of inventions D1 and E1.

[Invention C2] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention C2 is the gaming machine of Invention C1,
The second special prize state generating means generates a high probability state in which the winning probability of the lottery by the lottery means is higher than the normal state as the second special prize state.

  In such a configuration, when it is determined that the second special prize state is to be generated, the second special prize state is determined by the second special prize state generating means to have a high probability state in which the winning probability of the lottery by the lottery means is higher than the normal state. Occurs as.

  As a result, when the identification information is stopped and displayed with contents other than the predetermined contents, and a high probability state in which the winning probability of the lottery by the lottery means is higher than the normal state occurs, the special prize state signal is not output. Can be further reduced.

[Invention C3] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention C3 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions C1 and C2,
The first special prize state generation means includes a special prize state in which a player is given a gaming value higher than a normal state, and a short time state in which the change time of the identification information is shortened below a predetermined value. Generated as
The special prize state signal output means outputs the special prize state signal when it is determined that the second special prize state is to be generated based on the lottery result of the lottery means in the short-time state. To do.

With such a configuration, when it is determined that the first special prize state is to be generated, the first special prize state generating means gives the player a higher gaming value than the normal state, and subsequently A short time state in which the change time of the identification information is shorter than a predetermined time occurs as the first special prize state.

  If it is determined that the second special prize state is to be generated in the short-time state, the special prize state signal is output by the special prize state signal output means.

  As a result, even when it is determined that the second special prize state is to be generated, the special prize state signal is output in the time reduction state, so that it is possible to grasp that the time reduction state has occurred in the calling lamp device or the like.

[Invention C4] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention C4 is the gaming machine of Invention C3,
When the special prize state signal output means determines that the second special prize state is to be generated based on the lottery result of the lottery means in the short-time state, the special prize state is generated when the first special prize state occurs. The award status signal is output with a delay from the signal output timing.

  With such a configuration, when it is determined that the second special prize state is to be generated in the short-time state, the special prize state signal output means outputs the special prize state signal when the first special prize state is generated. The special status signal is output after a delay.

  As a result, the player cannot immediately grasp that the second special prize state has occurred even when viewing the display of the calling lamp device or the like. Therefore, possibility that the taste of a game will fall can be reduced.

[Invention C5] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention C5 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions C1 to C4,
Furthermore, when it is determined that the first special prize state or the second special prize state is to be generated, a winning opening that is opened to allow a game ball to be awarded,
A game ball payout means for paying out a game ball when a game ball wins the winning opening;
The first special prize state generating means executes a long opening round that opens the winning opening for a predetermined time in one round,
The second special prize state generating means executes a short opening round in which the winning opening is opened for a time shorter than the predetermined time in one round.

  If it is such a structure, when it determines with generating a 1st special prize state, a long open round will be performed by the 1st special prize state generation means. At this time, when the game ball wins the opened winning opening, the game ball is paid out by the game ball paying means.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special prize state is to be generated, the short special round is executed by the second special prize state generating means. At this time, when the game ball wins the opened winning opening, the game ball is paid out by the game ball paying means. Since the short opening round has a shorter opening time of the winning opening than the long opening round, the player cannot immediately know that the special prize state has occurred even when looking at the operation of the winning opening. Therefore, it is possible to give an unexpectedness as if the state suddenly shifted to the second special prize state.

  Here, the long open round or the short open round may be executed only once or may be executed a plurality of times. The number of executions may not be the same every time and may be different every time. Hereinafter, the same applies to the gaming machines of inventions D4 and E3.

[Invention C6] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention C6 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions C1 to C5.
And a signal holding means for holding the special prize state signal for a predetermined time after inputting the special prize state signal,
The award status signal output means outputs the award status signal at the predetermined time interval.

  With such a configuration, the special status signal is output at predetermined time intervals by the special status signal output unit, and the special status signal is held for a predetermined time after the special status signal is output by the signal holding unit. Therefore, even when the special prize state signal output means is realized by interrupt processing, the special prize state signal is constantly output, so that the special prize state signal can be easily detected by the calling lamp device or the like.

[Invention C7] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention C7 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions C1 to C5.
The award status signal output means outputs the award status signal at a predetermined time interval.

  With such a configuration, the special status signal is output at predetermined time intervals by the special status signal output means. Therefore, when the special prize state signal output means is realized by interrupt processing, the signal holding means need not be provided, and the configuration becomes simple.

[Invention D1] On the other hand, the gaming machine of Invention D1 is
Lottery means for performing lottery for generating the first special prize state or the second special prize state in response to establishment of the predetermined condition;
Identification information changing means for changing and displaying the identification information on the display means;
A first special prize state generating means for stopping and displaying the identification information with a predetermined content and generating the first special prize state when it is determined that the first special prize state is to be generated based on the lottery result of the lottery means; ,
When it is determined that the second special prize state is to be generated based on the lottery result of the lottery means, the identification information is stopped and displayed with contents other than the predetermined contents, and the second special prize is generated to generate the second special prize state. State generating means;
A special status signal output means for outputting a special status signal indicating the occurrence of the special status,
When it is determined that the first special prize state is to be generated based on the lottery result of the lottery means, the special prize state signal output means outputs the special prize state signal, and based on the lottery result of the lottery means, the first prize state signal is output. When it is determined that the two special prize states are to be generated, the special prize state signal is output with a delay from the timing of outputting the special prize state signal when the first special prize state is generated.

  If it is such a structure, a lottery for generating a 1st special prize state or a 2nd special prize state will be performed by a lottery means at the time of establishment of a predetermined condition, and identification information will be displayed by a display means by an identification information change means. Is displayed.

  When it is determined that the first special prize state is to be generated based on the lottery result of the lottery means, the first special prize state generating means stops the identification information with a predetermined content, and the first special prize state is generated. Then, the special status signal is output by the special status signal output means.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special prize state is to be generated based on the lottery result of the lottery means, the identification information is stopped and displayed with the contents other than the predetermined contents by the second special prize state generating means. A condition occurs. Since the identification information is stopped and displayed with contents other than the predetermined contents, it is difficult to recognize that the special prize state has occurred. Then, the special status signal output means outputs the special status signal after the timing of outputting the special status signal when the first special status occurs.

  Thus, when it is determined that the first special prize state is generated, the special prize state signal is output, whereas when it is determined that the second special prize state is generated, the special prize state signal is output with a delay. The player cannot immediately grasp that the second special prize state has occurred even when viewing the display of the calling lamp device or the like. In addition, for example, when the second chance big hit is set as another game type, the player cannot immediately grasp that the second special prize state has occurred even when viewing the display of the calling lamp device or the like. In addition, for example, when displaying that a big hit has occurred after the occurrence of a big hit, the player must immediately know that the second special prize state has occurred even if he / she looks at the display on the calling lamp device etc. I can't. Furthermore, if the output timing of the special prize state signal is later than the display, the player can expect that the second special prize state will occur until it is displayed that a sudden big hit has occurred. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game taste is reduced as compared with the conventional case.

[Invention D2] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention D2 is the gaming machine of Invention D1,
The second special prize state generating means has a special prize state that gives a player a gaming value higher than that in the normal state, and subsequently a high probability state in which the winning probability of the lottery by the lottery means is higher than that in the normal state. It is generated as a second special prize state.

  With such a configuration, when it is determined that the second special prize state is to be generated, the second special prize state generating means gives the player a higher gaming value than the normal state, and subsequently A high probability state in which the winning probability of the lottery by the lottery means is higher than the normal state occurs as the second special prize state.

  As a result, the identification information is stopped and displayed with contents other than the predetermined contents, and a special prize state in which a player is given a gaming value higher than the normal state, and subsequently, the winning probability of the lottery by the lottery means is lower than the normal state When the high probability state occurs, the special prize state signal is output with a delay, so that the possibility that the game taste is lowered can be further reduced.

[Invention D3] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention D3 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions D1 and D2,
Furthermore, it comprises a second special prize state generation display means for displaying on the display means that the second special prize state has occurred,
The award status signal output means outputs the award status signal after displaying the occurrence of the second award status by the second award status occurrence display means.

  If it is such a structure, it will be displayed on a display means that the 2nd special prize state generate | occur | produced by the 2nd special prize state generation display means. When it is determined that the second special prize state is to be generated, the special prize state signal is output after the occurrence of the second special prize state is displayed by the special prize state signal output means.

  Thereby, the player can have an expectation that the second special prize state will occur until the occurrence of the second special prize state is displayed, so that the possibility that the game preference is lowered may be further reduced. it can.

[Invention D4] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention D4 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions D1 to D3,
Furthermore, when it is determined that the first special prize state or the second special prize state is to be generated, a winning opening that is opened to allow a game ball to be awarded,
A game ball payout means for paying out a game ball when a game ball wins the winning opening;
The first special prize state generating means executes a long opening round that opens the winning opening for a predetermined time in one round,
The second special prize state generating means executes a short opening round that opens the winning opening for a time shorter than the predetermined time in one round, and then executes the long opening round.

  If it is such a structure, when it determines with generating a 1st special prize state, a long open round will be performed by the 1st special prize state generation means. At this time, when the game ball wins the opened winning opening, the game ball is paid out by the game ball paying means.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special prize state is to be generated, the second special prize state generating unit executes the short release round, and then the long release round is executed. At this time, when the game ball wins the opened winning opening, the game ball is paid out by the game ball paying means. Since the short opening round has a shorter opening time of the winning opening than the long opening round, the player cannot immediately know that the special prize state has occurred even when looking at the operation of the winning opening. Therefore, it is possible to give an unexpectedness as if the state suddenly shifted to the second special prize state.

[Invention D5] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention D5 is the gaming machine of Invention D4,
The award status signal output means outputs the award status signal after the short opening round or just before the end.

  With such a configuration, when it is determined that the second special prize state is to be generated, the special prize state signal is output by the special prize state signal output means after or shortly after the short opening round.

  As a result, the player cannot immediately grasp that the second special prize state has occurred regardless of the display of the calling lamp device or the like or the operation of the winning opening. Therefore, it is possible to further reduce the possibility that the game taste is lowered.

[Invention D6] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention D6 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions D1 to D5,
And a signal holding means for holding the special prize state signal for a predetermined time after inputting the special prize state signal,
The award status signal output means outputs the award status signal at the predetermined time interval.

  With such a configuration, the special status signal is output at predetermined time intervals by the special status signal output unit, and the special status signal is held for a predetermined time after the special status signal is output by the signal holding unit. Therefore, even when the special prize state signal output means is realized by interrupt processing, the special prize state signal is constantly output, so that the special prize state signal can be easily detected by the calling lamp device or the like.

[Invention D7] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention D7 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions D1 to D5,
The award status signal output means outputs the award status signal at a predetermined time interval.

  With such a configuration, the special status signal is output at predetermined time intervals by the special status signal output means. Therefore, when the special prize state signal output means is realized by interrupt processing, the signal holding means need not be provided, and the configuration becomes simple.

[Invention D8] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention D8 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions D1 to D7,
Furthermore, a storage means is provided,
The first special prize state generating means and the second special prize state generating means store special prize state signal data for designating output of the special prize state signal in the storage means when the special prize state is generated,
If it is determined that the first special prize state is generated, the special prize state signal output means outputs the special prize state signal as soon as the special prize state signal data is stored in the storage means, and the second special prize state When it is determined that the special prize state signal data is to be generated, the special prize state signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed since the special prize state signal data was stored in the storage means.

  With such a configuration, when it is determined that the first special prize state is to be generated, the first special prize state generation means stores the special prize state signal data in the storage means when the first special prize state occurs. Then, as soon as the special status signal data is stored in the storage means by the special status signal output means, the special status signal is output.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special prize state is to be generated, the special prize state signal data is stored in the storage means when the second special prize state is generated by the second special prize state generating means. The special status signal output means outputs the special status signal after a predetermined time has elapsed since the special status signal data was stored in the storage means.

  As a result, it is only necessary to store the special prize state signal data in the storage means at the timing of generating the first special prize state or the second special prize state, so that the configuration of the first special prize state generating means and the second special prize state generating means is simplified. Become.

[Invention E1] On the other hand, the gaming machine of Invention E1 is
Lottery means for performing lottery for generating the first special prize state or the second special prize state in response to establishment of the predetermined condition;
Identification information changing means for changing and displaying the identification information on the display means;
A first special prize state generating means for stopping and displaying the identification information with a predetermined content and generating the first special prize state when it is determined that the first special prize state is to be generated based on the lottery result of the lottery means; ,
When it is determined that the second special prize state is generated based on the lottery result of the lottery means, the identification information is stopped and displayed with contents other than the predetermined contents, and the winning probability of the lottery by the lottery means is in a normal state A second special prize state generating means for generating a higher probability state than the second special prize state;
A special status signal output means for outputting a special status signal indicating the occurrence of the special status,
When it is determined that the first special prize state is to be generated based on the lottery result of the lottery means, the special prize state signal output means outputs the special prize state signal, and based on the lottery result of the lottery means, the first prize state signal is output. When it is determined that the two special prize states are to be generated, the special prize state signal is output with a delay from the timing of outputting the special prize state signal when the first special prize state is generated.

  If it is such a structure, a lottery for generating a 1st special prize state or a 2nd special prize state will be performed by a lottery means at the time of establishment of a predetermined condition, and identification information will be displayed by a display means by an identification information change means. Is displayed.

When it is determined that the first special prize state is to be generated based on the lottery result of the lottery means, the first special prize state generating means stops the identification information with a predetermined content, and the first special prize state is generated. Then, the special status signal is output by the special status signal output means.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special prize state is generated based on the lottery result of the lottery means, the identification information is stopped and displayed by the second special prize state generation means with contents other than the predetermined contents. A high probability state in which the winning probability of the lottery is higher than the normal state occurs as the second special prize state. Since the identification information is stopped and displayed with contents other than the predetermined contents, it is difficult to recognize that the special prize state has occurred. Then, the special status signal output means outputs the special status signal after the timing of outputting the special status signal when the first special status occurs.

  Thus, when it is determined that the first special prize state is generated, the special prize state signal is output, whereas when it is determined that the second special prize state is generated, the special prize state signal is output with a delay. The player cannot immediately grasp that the second special prize state has occurred even when viewing the display of the calling lamp device or the like. In addition, for example, when the second chance big hit is set as another game type, the player cannot immediately grasp that the second special prize state has occurred even when viewing the display of the calling lamp device or the like. In addition, for example, when displaying that a big hit has occurred after the occurrence of a big hit, the player must immediately know that the second special prize state has occurred even if he / she looks at the display on the calling lamp device etc. I can't. Furthermore, if the output timing of the special prize state signal is later than the display, the player can expect that the second special prize state will occur until it is displayed that a sudden big hit has occurred. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game taste is reduced as compared with the conventional case.

  In addition, when the identification information is stopped and displayed with contents other than the predetermined contents and a high probability state in which the winning probability of the lottery by the lottery means is higher than the normal state occurs, the special prize state signal is output with a delay. It is possible to further reduce the possibility that the taste of the product will decrease.

[Invention E2] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention E2 is the gaming machine of Invention E1,
Furthermore, it comprises a second special prize state generation display means for displaying on the display means that the second special prize state has occurred,
The award status signal output means outputs the award status signal after displaying the occurrence of the second award status by the second award status occurrence display means.

  If it is such a structure, it will be displayed on a display means that the 2nd special prize state generate | occur | produced by the 2nd special prize state generation display means. When it is determined that the second special prize state is to be generated, the special prize state signal is output after the occurrence of the second special prize state is displayed by the special prize state signal output means.

  Thereby, the player can have an expectation that the second special prize state will occur until the occurrence of the second special prize state is displayed, so that the possibility that the game preference is lowered may be further reduced. it can.

[Invention E3] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention E3 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions E1 and E2,
Furthermore, when it is determined that the first special prize state or the second special prize state is to be generated, a winning opening that is opened to allow a game ball to be awarded,
A game ball payout means for paying out a game ball when a game ball wins the winning opening;
The first special prize state generating means executes a long opening round that opens the winning opening for a predetermined time in one round,
The second special prize state generating means executes a short opening round in which the winning opening is opened for a time shorter than the predetermined time in one round.

  If it is such a structure, when it determines with generating a 1st special prize state, a long open round will be performed by the 1st special prize state generation means. At this time, when the game ball wins the opened winning opening, the game ball is paid out by the game ball paying means.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special prize state is to be generated, the short special round is executed by the second special prize state generating means. At this time, when the game ball wins the opened winning opening, the game ball is paid out by the game ball paying means. Since the short opening round has a shorter opening time of the winning opening than the long opening round, the player cannot immediately know that the special prize state has occurred even when looking at the operation of the winning opening. Therefore, it is possible to give an unexpectedness as if the state suddenly shifted to the second special prize state.

[Invention E4] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention E4 is the gaming machine of Invention E3,
The award status signal output means outputs the award status signal after the short opening round or just before the end.

  With such a configuration, when it is determined that the second special prize state is to be generated, the special prize state signal is output by the special prize state signal output means after or shortly after the short opening round.

  As a result, the player cannot immediately grasp that the second special prize state has occurred regardless of the display of the calling lamp device or the like or the operation of the winning opening. Therefore, it is possible to further reduce the possibility that the game taste is lowered.

[Invention E5] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention E5 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions E1 to E4.
And a signal holding means for holding the special prize state signal for a predetermined time after inputting the special prize state signal,
The award status signal output means outputs the award status signal at the predetermined time interval.

  With such a configuration, the special status signal is output at predetermined time intervals by the special status signal output unit, and the special status signal is held for a predetermined time after the special status signal is output by the signal holding unit. Therefore, even when the special prize state signal output means is realized by interrupt processing, the special prize state signal is constantly output, so that the special prize state signal can be easily detected by the calling lamp device or the like.

[Invention E6] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention E6 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions E1 to E4.
The award status signal output means outputs the award status signal at a predetermined time interval.

  With such a configuration, the special status signal is output at predetermined time intervals by the special status signal output means. Therefore, when the special prize state signal output means is realized by interrupt processing, the signal holding means need not be provided, and the configuration becomes simple.

[Invention E7] Furthermore, the gaming machine of Invention E7 is the gaming machine of any one of Inventions E1 to E6.
Furthermore, a storage means is provided,
The first special prize state generating means and the second special prize state generating means store special prize state signal data for designating output of the special prize state signal in the storage means when the special prize state is generated,
If it is determined that the first special prize state is generated, the special prize state signal output means outputs the special prize state signal as soon as the special prize state signal data is stored in the storage means, and the second special prize state When it is determined that the special prize state signal data is to be generated, the special prize state signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed since the special prize state signal data was stored in the storage means.

  With such a configuration, when it is determined that the first special prize state is to be generated, the first special prize state generation means stores the special prize state signal data in the storage means when the first special prize state occurs. Then, as soon as the special status signal data is stored in the storage means by the special status signal output means, the special status signal is output.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special prize state is to be generated, the special prize state signal data is stored in the storage means when the second special prize state is generated by the second special prize state generating means. The special status signal output means outputs the special status signal after a predetermined time has elapsed since the special status signal data was stored in the storage means.

  As a result, it is only necessary to store the special prize state signal data in the storage means at the timing of generating the first special prize state or the second special prize state, so that the configuration of the first special prize state generating means and the second special prize state generating means is simplified. Become.

[Invention F1] On the other hand, the connection terminal device of Invention F1 is
A connection terminal device comprising a base and a plurality of wiring connection portions formed on the base,
The wiring connection portion is
A first opening formed in the substrate and into which wiring is inserted;
A second opening formed in the base and into which wiring is inserted;
A first terminal portion electrically connected to the wiring;
A second terminal portion electrically connected to the wiring;
One end of the base is swingably supported, and a pressing operation portion is formed at the other end. The first pressing portion presses the wiring inserted from the first opening to the first terminal portion, and A swing operation member formed with a second pressing portion for pressing the wiring inserted from the second opening portion against the second terminal portion;
One of the wiring connection portions is disposed adjacent to the other wiring connection portion so that the extending direction of the push-in operation portion is reversed.

  With such a configuration, when the push-in operation unit is pushed in, the swing operation member swings around the one end. When wiring is inserted from the first opening and wiring is inserted from the second opening, the wiring is between the first pressing portion and the first terminal portion and between the second pressing portion and the second terminal portion. And are electrically connected to the first terminal portion and the second terminal portion, respectively.

  At this time, since the two wiring connecting portions are arranged adjacent to each other so that the extending direction of the push operation portion is opposite, even if the overall width of the connection terminal device is reduced, the adjacent wiring connecting portions It is possible to reduce the possibility of accidentally pushing the pushing operation units simultaneously. Therefore, even if the overall width of the connection terminal device is reduced, the wiring can be easily connected as compared with the conventional case.

[Invention F2] Furthermore, the connection terminal device of Invention F2 is the connection terminal device of Invention F1,
One of the wiring connection parts is arranged at least every other wiring connection part so that the push operation parts are arranged side by side, and the height of the push operation part in the wiring connection part is It is set so that it may differ from the height of the said pushing operation part in another wiring connection part.

  With such a configuration, at least every other two wiring connection portions are arranged so that the push operation portions are arranged side by side, and the heights of the push operation portions in these wire connection portions are set to be different. Therefore, even if the overall width of the connection terminal device is reduced, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the adjacent push-in operation parts are simultaneously pushed in by mistake. Therefore, even if the overall width of the connection terminal device is reduced, the connection of wiring is further facilitated.

[Invention F3] Furthermore, the connection terminal device of Invention F3 is the connection terminal device of any one of Inventions F1 and F2,
One of the wiring connection portions is arranged at least every other wiring connection portion so that the push operation portions are arranged side by side, and the direction toward the tip of the push operation portion in the wiring connection portion Is set to be different from the length in the direction toward the tip of the pushing operation portion in the other wiring connection portion.

  With such a configuration, at least every other two wiring connection portions are arranged so that the push operation portions are arranged side by side, and the lengths of the wiring connection portions in the direction toward the tip of the push operation portion are different. Therefore, even if the overall width of the connection terminal device is reduced, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the adjacent push-in operation unit is pushed in at the same time by mistake. Therefore, even if the overall width of the connection terminal device is reduced, the connection of wiring is further facilitated.

[Invention F4] Furthermore, the connection terminal device of Invention F4 is the connection terminal device of any one of Inventions F1 to F3,
Furthermore, the first pressing portion and the second pressing portion are provided with urging means for urging the swing operation member in a direction in contact with the first terminal portion and the second terminal portion.

  With such a configuration, when the pushing operation portion is pushed against the urging force of the urging means, the oscillating operation member oscillates around the one end. Then, when the wiring is inserted from the first opening and the wiring is inserted from the second opening, respectively, when the drag to the urging means is released, the wirings are connected to the first pressing portion and the first by the urging force of the urging means. It is sandwiched between the terminal portion and between the second pressing portion and the second terminal portion, and is electrically connected to the first terminal portion and the second terminal portion, respectively.

  Accordingly, the wiring is sandwiched between the first pressing portion and the first terminal portion and between the second pressing portion and the second terminal portion by the urging force of the urging means. And it can connect more reliably with the 2nd terminal part.

[Invention F5] Furthermore, the connection terminal device of Invention F5 is the connection terminal device of any one of Inventions F1 to F3,
The center of gravity of the swing operation member is set so that the first pressing portion and the second pressing portion come into contact with the first terminal portion and the second terminal portion by the weight of the swing operation member. Features.

  With such a configuration, when the push-in operation portion is pushed against the weight of the swing operation member, the swing operation member swings around the one end. Then, when the wiring is inserted from the first opening and the wiring is inserted from the second opening, and the swing of the swing operation member is released, the wires are connected to the first pressing portion and the first press by the weight of the swing operation member. It is sandwiched between the first terminal portion and between the second pressing portion and the second terminal portion, and is electrically connected to the first terminal portion and the second terminal portion, respectively.

As a result, the wiring is sandwiched between the first pressing portion and the first terminal portion and between the second pressing portion and the second terminal portion by the weight of the swing operation member. And it can connect more reliably with the 2nd terminal part. Further, since the urging means and the like need not be provided, the configuration is simplified.

[Invention F6] Furthermore, the connection terminal device of the invention F6 is the connection terminal device of the invention F4.
Furthermore, a restriction part for restricting the expansion / contraction direction of the urging means is provided.

  With such a configuration, since the expansion / contraction operation of the urging means is restricted by the restricting portion, the swing operation member can be appropriately urged toward the first terminal portion and the second terminal portion.

[Invention F7] Furthermore, the connection terminal device according to Invention F7 is the connection terminal device according to any one of Inventions F1 to F6.
The rocking operation member is formed with a valley portion recessed inwardly on a surface between the first pressing portion and the rocking shaft of the rocking operation member and facing the first terminal portion. It is characterized by that.

  With such a configuration, when the swing operation member is swung, a space is formed between the first pressing portion and the first terminal portion, so that wiring can be easily inserted.

[Invention F8] Furthermore, the connection terminal device according to Invention F8 is the connection terminal device according to any one of Inventions F1 to F6.
The rocking operation member is formed with a valley portion recessed inward on a surface between the second pressing portion and the rocking shaft of the rocking operation member and facing the second terminal portion. It is characterized by that.

  With such a configuration, when the swing operation member is swung, a space is formed between the second pressing portion and the second terminal portion, so that the wiring can be easily inserted.

[Invention F9] Furthermore, the connection terminal device of Invention F9 is the connection terminal device of any one of Inventions F1 to F8,
A claw projecting upward is formed at the top end of the pushing operation portion.

  With such a configuration, it is only necessary to place the finger on the nail and push the push operation unit, so that the push operation unit is easy to operate.

[Invention F10] Furthermore, the connection terminal device of Invention F10 is the connection terminal device of Invention F3,
A claw protruding upward is formed at the top of the tip of the push-in operation part,
The height of the claw of the push operation unit that is short in the direction toward the tip among the adjacent push operation units is set higher than the claw of the other push operation unit that is adjacent. And

  With such a configuration, it is only necessary to place the finger on the nail and push the push operation unit, so that the push operation unit is easy to operate. In addition, it is difficult to put a finger on the pushing operation portion whose length in the direction toward the tip is short. However, since the height of the nail is high, it becomes easy to put the finger on the nail, and the pushing operation portion becomes easier to operate.

[Invention F11] Furthermore, the connection terminal device according to Invention F11 is the connection terminal device according to any one of Inventions F1 to F10.
The wiring connection portions arranged adjacent to each other are colored in different colors.

  With such a configuration, it is easy to distinguish between adjacent wiring connection portions, so that the possibility of erroneous wiring connection can be reduced.

[Invention F12] Furthermore, the connection terminal device of Invention F12 is the connection terminal device of any one of Inventions F1 to F11.
The present invention is applied to a gaming machine and outputs information related to the gaming machine.

  If it is such a structure, if wiring, a 1st terminal part, and a 2nd terminal part are connected, the information regarding a gaming machine will be output.

  Thereby, a gaming machine whose various sizes are defined in the standard is preferable because a large number of wiring connection portions can be provided while maintaining the width of the connection terminal device.

[Invention F13] On the other hand, the gaming machine of Invention F13 is
A connecting terminal device according to inventions F1 to F12 is provided.

  Such a configuration is suitable for a gaming machine whose various sizes are defined by the standard, since a large number of wiring connection portions can be provided while maintaining the width of the connection terminal device.

[Invention G1] On the other hand, the connection terminal device of Invention G1 is
A connection terminal device comprising a base and a plurality of wiring connection portions formed on the base,
The wiring connection portion is
A first opening formed in the substrate and into which wiring is inserted;
A second opening formed in the base and into which wiring is inserted;
A first terminal portion electrically connected to the wiring;
A second terminal portion electrically connected to the wiring;
One end portion is swingably supported by the base body, a pushing operation portion is formed at the other end portion, and a first pressing portion is formed to press the wiring inserted from the first opening portion to the first terminal portion. A first swing operation member having a first gear attached to the swing shaft;
One end of the base is swingably supported, a second pressing portion is formed to press the wiring inserted from the second opening to the second terminal portion, and a second gear is attached to the swing shaft. And a second swing operation member that meshes with the first gear,
One of the wiring connection portions is disposed adjacent to the other wiring connection portion so that the extending direction of the push-in operation portion is reversed.

  If it is such a structure, if a pushing operation part is pushed in, a 1st rocking | fluctuation operation member will rock | fluctuate centering on an end part. Along with this, the second swing operation member also swings around the one end portion through the first gear and the second gear. When wiring is inserted from the first opening and wiring is inserted from the second opening, the wiring is between the first pressing portion and the first terminal portion and between the second pressing portion and the second terminal portion. And are electrically connected to the first terminal portion and the second terminal portion, respectively.

  At this time, since the two wiring connecting portions are arranged adjacent to each other so that the extending direction of the push operation portion is opposite, even if the overall width of the connection terminal device is reduced, the adjacent wiring connecting portions It is possible to reduce the possibility of accidentally pushing the pushing operation units simultaneously. Therefore, even if the overall width of the connection terminal device is reduced, the wiring can be easily connected as compared with the conventional case.

[Invention G2] Furthermore, the connection terminal device of Invention G2 is the connection terminal device of Invention G1,
One of the wiring connection parts is arranged at least every other wiring connection part so that the push operation parts are arranged side by side, and the height of the push operation part in the wiring connection part is It is set so that it may differ from the height of the said pushing operation part in another wiring connection part.

  With such a configuration, at least every other two wiring connection portions are arranged so that the push operation portions are arranged side by side, and the heights of the push operation portions in these wire connection portions are set to be different. Therefore, even if the overall width of the connection terminal device is reduced, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the adjacent push-in operation parts are simultaneously pushed in by mistake. Therefore, even if the overall width of the connection terminal device is reduced, the connection of wiring is further facilitated.

[Invention G3] Furthermore, the connection terminal device of Invention G3 is the connection terminal device of any one of Inventions G1 and G2,
One of the wiring connection portions is arranged at least every other wiring connection portion so that the push operation portions are arranged side by side, and the direction toward the tip of the push operation portion in the wiring connection portion Is set to be different from the length in the direction toward the tip of the pushing operation portion in the other wiring connection portion.

  With such a configuration, at least every other two wiring connection portions are arranged so that the push operation portions are arranged side by side, and the lengths of the wiring connection portions in the direction toward the tip of the push operation portion are different. Therefore, even if the overall width of the connection terminal device is reduced, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the adjacent push-in operation unit is pushed in at the same time by mistake. Therefore, even if the overall width of the connection terminal device is reduced, the connection of wiring is further facilitated.

[Invention G4] Furthermore, the connection terminal device of Invention G4 is the connection terminal device of any one of Inventions G1 to G3,
Further, the first pressing portion includes an urging unit that urges the first swing operation member in a direction in which the first pressing portion contacts the first terminal portion.

  With such a configuration, when the pushing operation portion is pushed against the urging force of the urging means, the first oscillating operation member oscillates with the one end portion as the shaft. Along with this, the second swing operation member also swings around one end. Then, when the wiring is inserted from the first opening and the wiring is inserted from the second opening, respectively, when the drag to the urging means is released, the wirings are connected to the first pressing portion and the first by the urging force of the urging means. It is sandwiched between the terminal portion and between the second pressing portion and the second terminal portion, and is electrically connected to the first terminal portion and the second terminal portion, respectively.

  Accordingly, the wiring is sandwiched between the first pressing portion and the first terminal portion and between the second pressing portion and the second terminal portion by the urging force of the urging means. And it can connect more reliably with the 2nd terminal part.

[Invention G5] Furthermore, the connection terminal device of Invention G5 is the connection terminal device of any one of Inventions G1 to G3,
The center of gravity of the first swing operation member is set so that the first pressing portion comes into contact with the first terminal portion by the weight of the first swing operation member.

  With such a configuration, when the push-in operation portion is pushed in against the own weight of the first rocking operation member, the first rocking operation member swings around the one end. Along with this, the second swing operation member also swings around one end. Then, when the wiring is inserted from the first opening and the wiring is inserted from the second opening, and the swinging of the first swing operation member is released, the wires are moved to the first by the weight of the first swing operation member. It is sandwiched between the pressing portion and the first terminal portion and between the second pressing portion and the second terminal portion, and is electrically connected to the first terminal portion and the second terminal portion, respectively.

  Accordingly, the wiring is sandwiched between the first pressing portion and the first terminal portion and between the second pressing portion and the second terminal portion by the weight of the first swing operation member. The terminal portion and the second terminal portion can be more reliably connected. Further, since the urging means and the like need not be provided, the configuration is simplified.

[Invention G6] Furthermore, the connection terminal device of the invention G6 is the connection terminal device of the invention G4.
Furthermore, a restriction part for restricting the expansion / contraction direction of the urging means is provided.

  With such a configuration, since the expansion / contraction operation of the urging means is restricted by the restricting portion, the first swing operation member can be appropriately urged toward the first terminal portion.

[Invention G7] Furthermore, the connection terminal device of Invention G7 is the connection terminal device of any one of Inventions G1 to G6.
The first swing operation member has a trough recessed inward on a surface between the first pressing portion and the swing shaft of the first swing operation member and facing the first terminal portion. It is formed.

  With such a configuration, when the first swing operation member is swung, a space is formed between the first pressing portion and the first terminal portion, so that the wiring can be easily inserted.

[Invention G8] Furthermore, the connection terminal device of Invention G8 is the connection terminal device of any one of Inventions G1 to G6,
The second swing operation member has a valley portion recessed inwardly on a surface between the second pressing portion and the swing shaft of the second swing operation member and facing the second terminal portion. It is formed.

  With such a configuration, when the second swing operation member is swung, a space is formed between the second pressing portion and the second terminal portion, so that the wiring can be easily inserted.

[Invention G9] Furthermore, the connection terminal device of Invention G9 is the connection terminal device of any one of Inventions G1 to G8.
A claw projecting upward is formed at the top end of the pushing operation portion.

  With such a configuration, it is only necessary to place the finger on the nail and push the push operation unit, so that the push operation unit is easy to operate.

[Invention G10] Furthermore, the connection terminal device of Invention G10 is the connection terminal device of Invention G3,
A claw protruding upward is formed at the top of the tip of the push-in operation part,
The height of the claw of the push operation unit that is short in the direction toward the tip among the adjacent push operation units is set higher than the claw of the other push operation unit that is adjacent. And

  With such a configuration, it is only necessary to place the finger on the nail and push the push operation unit, so that the push operation unit is easy to operate. In addition, it is difficult to put a finger on the pushing operation portion whose length in the direction toward the tip is short. However, since the height of the nail is high, it becomes easy to put the finger on the nail, and the pushing operation portion becomes easier to operate.

[Invention G11] Furthermore, the connection terminal device of Invention G11 is the connection terminal device of any one of Inventions G1 to G10,
The wiring connection portions arranged adjacent to each other are colored in different colors.

  With such a configuration, it is easy to distinguish between adjacent wiring connection portions, so that the possibility of erroneous wiring connection can be reduced.

[Invention G12] Furthermore, the connection terminal device according to Invention G12 is the connection terminal device according to any one of Inventions G1 to G11.
The present invention is applied to a gaming machine and outputs information related to the gaming machine.

  If it is such a structure, if wiring, a 1st terminal part, and a 2nd terminal part are connected, the information regarding a gaming machine will be output.

  Thereby, a gaming machine whose various sizes are defined in the standard is preferable because a large number of wiring connection portions can be provided while maintaining the width of the connection terminal device.

[Invention G13] On the other hand, the gaming machine of Invention G13 is
A connecting terminal device according to invention G1 to G12 is provided.

  Such a configuration is suitable for a gaming machine whose various sizes are defined by the standard, since a large number of wiring connection portions can be provided while maintaining the width of the connection terminal device.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 11 ... Outer frame, 12 ... Main part of game machine, 13 ... Main body frame, 14 ... Front door frame, 15 ... Back pack unit, 21 ... Window part, 22 ... Glass, 23 ... Annular lighting part,
24 ... Error display lamp unit, 25 ... Prize ball lamp unit, 26 ... Speaker unit, 31 ... Upper bulge unit, 32 ... Lower bulge unit, 33 ... Upper plate, 34 ... Lower plate, 35 ... Operation buttons, 36 ... ball lending operation device, 37 ... ball lending button, 38 ... return button, 39 ... frequency display section, 41 ... game ball launch handle, 81 ... game board, 81a ... base plate, 82 ... general winning opening, 83 ... variable prize Equipment: 83a ... Large winning opening, 84 ... Starting winning opening, 85 ... Through gate, 86 ... Variable display unit, 87 ... Out opening, 88 ... Nail, 91 ... Direction display device, 92 ... Center frame, 93 ... Special design Display device, 93a ... LED93b, 242a ... 7-segment display, 94 ... Normal symbol display device, 94a, 502 ... Display section, 95,96 ... Holding lamp, 101 ... Inner rail, 102 ... Outer 103 ... Arc member, 104 ... Return ball prevention member, 105 ... Return rubber, 110 ... Game ball launching device, 143 ... Audio lamp control device, 241 ... Mount base, 244,246 ... Substrate box, 152a to 152c ... Winning mouth sensor, 153 ... Count sensor, 154 ... Start winning mouth sensor, 155 ... Gate sensor, 162 ... Main controller, 201 ... Back pack, 202 ... Dispensing mechanism, 204 ... Control device assembly unit, 211 ... Base part, 212 ... Protective cover part, 213 ... External terminal board, 214 ... Latching pin, 215 ... Fastener, 217 ... Body frame opening switch, 221 ... Tank, 222 ... Tank rail 223 ... Case rail, 223a ... No ball detection sensor, 223b ... ball removal switch, 224 ... dispensing device, 225 ... game ball distribution unit, 229 ... back pack base Plate, 229a ... Power switch, 242 ... Discharge control device, 243 ... Power supply and launch control device, 243a ... Power supply unit, 243b ... Launch control unit, 243c ... Power failure monitoring circuit, 243d ... RAM erase switch circuit, 245 ... State return switch 247 ... RAM erasure switch, 249 ... ball lending connection terminal plate, 258 ... dispensed ball detection sensor, 300 ... control system, 302 ... display control device, 310, 350, 370 ... MPU, 312, 352 ... ROM, 314, 354 ... RAM, 316, 356, 380 ... input port, 318, 358, 388 ... output port, 320, 360, 382, 390 ... bus, 362 ... audio output device 364 ... lamp display device, 372 ... program ROM, 374 ... Work RAM, 376 ... Image controller, 378 ... DMAC, 384 ... Character ROM, 386 ... Video RAM, 404, 408 ... Distribution structure table, 406 ... Variation pattern table, 410 ... Production data table, 500 ... Call lamp device, 504 ... Call button, 506 ... Call lamp, 508 ... Control , 510 ... Signal input part, 512 ... Signal output part, 520 522 ... Hub, 530 ... Hall computer, 600, 800 ... Connection terminal device,
602, 802 ... Base, 602a ... Back, 602b ... Front, 602c ... Right side,
602d ... left side, 602e ... upper surface, 602f ... lower surface, 604a, 604b, 604c, 604d, 604e, 604f, 804 ... wiring connection portions 606a, 606b, 606ca, 606cb, 606da, 606db, 606ea, 606b, 606fa, 6 806 ... wiring, 608a, 608b, 608ca, 608cb, 608da, 608db, 608ea, 608eb, 608fa, 608fb, 808 ... terminal board,
610a, 610b, 610c, 610d, 610ea, 610eb, 610fa, 610fb, 810 ... swinging operation member, 612a, 612b, 612c, 612d, 612e, 612f, 812 ... coil spring, 614a, 614b, 614ca, 614cb, 614d, , 614ea, 614eb, 614fa, 614fb, 814 ... opening, 616a, 616b, 616c, 616d, 616e, 616f ... notch holes 618a, 618b, 618ca, 618cb, 618da, 618db, 618ea, 618eb, 618b, 618eb, 618b Hole 620a, 620b, 620c, 620d, 620e, 620f ... Locking pin, 622a, 622b, 622c, 622d, 622e, 622f ... Swing support shaft, 6 4a, 624b, 624c, 624d, 624e, 624f, 824 ... push-in operation unit, 626a, 626b, 626c, 626d, 626e, 626f, 642a ... nail, 628a, 628b, 628ca, 628cb, 628da, 628e, 628e, 628e, 628e 628fa, 628fb, 828 ... pressing part, 630a, 630b, 630ca, 630cb, 630da, 630db, 630ea, 630eb, 630fa, 630fb ... trough part 632a, 632b, 632c, 632d, 632e, 632f, locking a part, 634f 634b, 634c, 634d, 634e, 634f ... regulator, 636a, 638a ... passage, 636ea, 636eb, 636fa, 636fb ... gear, 640a, 646a, 648a ... electrode, 64 4a ... tongue-like member, C1 ... big hit random number counter, C2 ... big hit type random number counter, C3 ... reach random number counter, C4 ... normal lottery random number counter, CINI1 ... first initial value random number counter, CINI2 ... second initial value random number counter, CS ... fluctuation pattern random number counter, CS1 ... fluctuation type counter, CS2 ... fluctuation type counter, CS3 ... fluctuation type counter, Dm ... main display area, Ds ... sub display area, Ds1 ... notice area, Ds2 ... notice area, H ... card Insertion slot K1, K2 ... Sticking space, L1 ... Effective line, PD1-PD10 ... Light emitting diode, R1a-R10a, R1b-R10b, R1c-R10c ... Resistance element, Ti1-Ti10 ... Input terminal, To1a-To10a, To1b- To10b, To ... output terminal, Tr1-Tr10 ... Pho Transistor, Y ... sphere rental equipment,
Z1 ... Left symbol row, Z2 ... Middle symbol row, Z3 ... Right symbol row

The gaming machine according to claim 1 is:
A connection terminal device having a base body and a plurality of wiring connection portions formed on the base body, winning means for allowing a game ball to enter when a predetermined lottery is won, and winning means of the winning means A gaming machine comprising winning control means for controlling operation and output control means for controlling information output from the plurality of wiring connection parts,
The wiring connection portion is
An opening formed on the upper surface of the substrate and into which wiring is inserted;
A terminal portion electrically connected to the wiring;
A swing operation member in which one end portion is swingably supported by the base body, a push operation portion is formed at the other end portion, and a press portion for pressing the wiring inserted from the opening portion against the terminal portion is formed. And
One of the wiring connection portions is arranged with respect to the other wiring connection portions so that the push operation portions are arranged side by side, and in the direction along the lower surface of the base body, The length from the swing shaft portion of the swing operation member to the tip of the push operation portion is set to be different from the length from the swing shaft portion to the tip of the push operation portion in the other wiring connection portion. Connection terminal device is provided,
The connection terminal apparatus is characterized in including that the wiring connection portion in which a predetermined information is output when the player wins the predetermined lottery.

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, an effect of facilitating the connection of the wiring can be obtained.

Claims (1)

A connection terminal device having a base body and a plurality of wiring connection portions formed on the base body, winning means for allowing a game ball to enter when a predetermined lottery is won, and winning means of the winning means A gaming machine comprising winning control means for controlling operation and output control means for controlling information output from the plurality of wiring connection parts,
The wiring connection portion is
An opening formed on the upper surface of the substrate and into which wiring is inserted;
A terminal portion electrically connected to the wiring;
A swing operation member in which one end portion is swingably supported by the base body, a push operation portion is formed at the other end portion, and a press portion for pressing the wiring inserted from the opening portion against the terminal portion is formed. And
One of the wiring connection portions is arranged with respect to the other wiring connection portions so that the push operation portions are arranged side by side, and in the direction along the lower surface of the base body, The length from the swing shaft portion of the swing operation member to the tip of the push operation portion is set to be different from the length from the swing shaft portion to the tip of the push operation portion in the other wiring connection portion. Connection terminal device is provided,
The connection terminal device includes a wiring connection unit that outputs predetermined information when the predetermined lottery is won,
The winning control means causes the winning means to perform a long opening operation that is released for a predetermined time when a predetermined number of game balls do not enter and a short opening operation that is released for a shorter time than the predetermined time. ,
The output control means, when winning the lottery in which the long release operation is executed after the short release operation is executed by the predetermined lottery, after the short release operation is executed a predetermined number of times, or A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined information is output immediately before execution of the predetermined number of short opening operations.

Images